Tally Genicom Printer Matrix Printer User Manual

7265

Programmer's Manual

Matrix printer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Chapter 3. ANSI Bar Codes....................................................................................................33

Before You Begin - Set the Form Length.............................................................................34

Setting Bar Code Parameters..............................................................................................35

General Rules for Assigning Parameters.........................................................................36

Bar Code Command Sequences .....................................................................................37

Element Widths................................................................................................................39

Other Parameters.............................................................................................................40

Delimiters.............................................................................................................................42

Horizontal Tab Delimiter...................................................................................................44

Horizontal Position - Relative Delimiter............................................................................45

Calculating Characters per Inch ..........................................................................................47

Bar Code Style Characteristics............................................................................................48

Interleaved 2 of 5 (Style 0)...............................................................................................48

Bidirectional/Industrial 2 of 5 (Styles 1 and 3)..................................................................48

Matrix 2 of 5 (Style 2).......................................................................................................49

Code 3 of 9 (Style 4) ........................................................................................................49

EAN-8 (Style 5) ................................................................................................................50

EAN-13 (Style 6) ..............................................................................................................50

Code 11 (Style 7) .............................................................................................................51

Codabar A/t, B/n, C/*, D/e (9, 10, 11, 12).........................................................................52

UPC-A (Style 13)..............................................................................................................52

UPC-E (Style 14)..............................................................................................................53

Code 93 (Style 15) ...........................................................................................................54

Code 128 (Style 16) .........................................................................................................54

MSI (Style 19) ..................................................................................................................55

POSTNET (Style 50)........................................................................................................56

Calculating the Checksum for Code 3 of 9 ..........................................................................58

Calculating the Checksum for CODE 93..............................................................................58

Code 93 Checksums for Full ASCII..................................................................................60

Chapter 4. ANSI Oversized Font.............................................................................................63

Control Function Summary..................................................................................................64

Oversized Control Functions ...............................................................................................64

Oversized Versus Expanded ...............................................................................................66

Setting the Expansion..........................................................................................................66

Device Timeout with Very Large Characters .......................................................................67

What is a Character Cell ?...................................................................................................68

Oversized Character Dimensions – 0^o...............................................................................69

Oversized Character Dimensions - 270^o...................................................................................70

Vertical Position-Relative in Oversized................................................................................70

Implementing the Line Feed Function - 0^o..........................................................................71

Line Spacing and Intercharacter Spacing – 270^o................................................................72

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Figures

........................................5

Figure 2-1 Default Character Set for ANSI Emulation, 00 to 7F

Figure 2-2 Default Character Set for ANSI Emulation, 80 to FF..............................................6

Figure 2-3 National Character Substitutions 0 - 18 ...............................................................17

Figure 2-4 Effects of Character Spacing Parameters............................................................22

Figure 2-5 Dot Column Coding..............................................................................................29

Figure 2-6 Dot Graphics Example ........................................................................................30

Figure 3-1 Parts of a Bar Code ............................................................................................35

Figure 3-2 Effects of Rotation Parameters ............................................................................40

Figure 3-3 Comma, Space, and Asterisk Delimiters..............................................................43

Figure 3-4 Horizontal Tab Delimiter.......................................................................................44

Figure 3-5 Horizontal Position-Relative Delimiter..................................................................45

Figure 3-6 Vertical Bar Code Sumbols.................................................................................46

Figure 4-1 Expanded and Oversized.....................................................................................66

Figure 4-2 Character Cells ....................................................................................................68

Figure 4-3 Vertical Character Dimensions.............................................................................69

Figure 4-4 Sideways Character Dimensions .........................................................................70

7265 Programmer’s Manual

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1. Introduction

The TallyGenicom7265 provides rugged, versatile impact printers useful in a variety of

applications. Flexibility of use is guaranteed by the wide range of software emulations and

programming options. The current printer characteristics are the result of years of application

experience. It is a hallmark of TallyGenicom products that they may be used with a broad

range of systems, hardware, emulations, and protocols.

All trademarks and registered trademarks are property of their respective holders.

CENTRONICS of GENICOM LLC

DEC of COMPAQ Corporation

Epson of Epson America, Incorporated

GENICOM of TallyGenicom LP

IBM and Proprinter of International Business Machines Corporation

The information in this manual is believed to be accurate and correct. However, TallyGenicom

makes no claim as to its absolute accuracy and reserves the right to make improvements to this

document from time to time.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

r 2. ANSI

The TallyGenicom im

ple m entation

of ANSI X3.64 is the native control protocol for the 7265

printer, as it is for a variety of other TallyGenicom impact matrix printer families. The control

functions presented here are a superset of ANSI control sets familiar to our customers. For the

most part, ANSI drivers written for other TallyGenicom printers should only need to be modified as

features introduced on the 7265 Series printers are exercised. Examples of such new features

include user-defined formats, alternate paper paths, user-defined character substitutions, and

remote selection of emulations.

Enabling the application to select among emulations provides access to some of the 7265

features not supported in emulated products. Toward this end, the printer can be commanded to

maintain the current status of fonts, pitches, tabs, margins and so forth across emulation

changes. Although some minute differences due to translations from, say, columns to decipoints

may be discernible when switching from one emulation to another, the printer is quite predictable

when switching from another emulation to ANSI and then back again.

The 7265 is a decipoint machine. Locations and dimensions such as tabs, margins, absolute and

relative positions, and form lengths are described in ANSI control sequences in units of 1/720

inch. If you have the choice of describing your page in one or another of the supported

emulations, consider that ANSI gives you more flexible control of locations of objects on the page.

In this chapter we include spaces between characters in escape sequences for clarity. ESC H,

for instance, is easier to read than is ESCH. Where the space character forms a component of a

control sequence, then it is designated by <SP> .

Listed below are the control codes interpreted by this printer, along with page numbers where you

can find detailed descriptions.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control Code Summary

Code

Hex Description

ETX

ACK

BEL

ETX/ACK Communication Protocol

Sound Beeper

Backspace

Horizontal Tab

Line Feed

Vertical Tab

Form Feed

Carriage Return

Barcode / Oversized On

Barcode / Oversized Off

Printer Ready

Printer Busy

Escape

DC1(XON)

DC3(XOFF)

ESC

DEL

Delete

If 8-bit control code interpretation is enabled ...

IND

NEL

HTS

VTS

PLD

PLU

DCS

PU1

CSI

Index

Next Line

Set Horizontal Tab

Set Vertical Tab

Partial Line Down

Partial Line Up

Reverse Index

Device Control String

Private Use 1

Control String Introducer

String Terminator

Straps and Options Introducer

OSC

Some of the control codes are interpreted when encountered within a graphics data sequence.

Interpretations relative to graphics are shown on page 31.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ompar ison, 7 Bi t/ 8 Bi t

8 B i t

Hex Description

7 Bit

Hex

IND

NEL

HTS

VTS

PLD

PLU

Index

ESC D

ESC E

ESC H

ESC J

ESC K

ESC L

ESC M

ESC P

ESC Q

ESC [

1B 44

1B 45

1B 48

1B 4A

1B 4B

1B 4C

1B 4D

1B 50

1B 51

1B 5B

1B 5C

1B 5D

Next Line

Set Horizontal Tab

Set Vertical Tab

Partial Line Down

8C Partial Line Up

8D Reverse Index

DCS

PU1

CSI

Device Control String

Private Use 1

Control String Introducer

9C String Terminator

ESC \

OSC

9D Straps and Options Introducer

ESC ]

8-bit Control Codes

ANSI assigns control functions to characters 80 hex through 9F hex and calls these characters

C1 codes. You can set the printer to either interpret 80 hex - 9F hex as control codes or not. The

ISU default status of this option is disabled.

You can toggle the status of the 8-bit control code enable from the Emulations Options Menu or

with escape sequences. The pertinent escape sequences are the ANSI private use sequences

described on page 12. In 8-bit mode, all of the lower contro l codes and ESC sequences remain

active. For example, you can use either PLD or ESC K for subscript printing. In 7-bit mode, only

ESC K is available.

If 8-bit control code interpretation is disabled, then the printer processes characters 80 hex

through 9F hex according to IBM PC character sets 1 or 2, depending on which is currently

selected. The default is character set 1. You can toggle the character set selection from the

Emulation Options Menu.

If 8-bit control code interpretation is disabled and character set 1 is active, then the printer strips

the most significant bit of characters 80 hex through 9F hex. For example, if you send 8A hex

when 8-bit control code interpretation is disabled and character set 1 is active, then the printer

treats 8A hex as 0A hex and performs a line feed.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

xade c imal, Orde red Column|Row

[

DC1

DC3

“

ETX

‘

ENQ

ACK

BEL

(

)

ESC

;

{

]

}

DEL

Figure 2-1 Default Character Set for ANSI Emulation, 00 to 7F

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code is Hexadecimal, Ordered Column|Row

DCS

PU1

(

)

;

IND

NEL

HTS

•

VTS

PLD

PLU

CSI

OSC

[

Figure 2-2 Default Character Set for ANSI Emulation, 80 to FF

Escape Sequence Summary

In this chart, the 7-bit representation is given. Use the Comparison Chart on page 4 to convert

7 bit to 8 bit sequences.

Code

ESC H

Description

Set Horizontal Tab

ESC J

ESC K

ESC L

ESC P

ESC c

ESC \

Set Vertical Tab

Subscript Printing

Superscript Printing

Enter Dot Graphics

Restore to Initial State

Exit Dot Graphics Modes

ESC [(p1);(p2)<SP>B

ESC [(p1);(p2)<SP>G

Graphic Size Modification

Line/Character Spacing

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code

Descripiton

ESC [(p1);(p2)<SP>~

ESC [(p)`

Select Emulation

Horizontal Position Absolute

ESC [(p)a

ESC [(p)d

ESC [(p)e

ESC [(p1);(p2)f

ESC [(Ps)g

Horizontal Position Relative

Vertical Position Absolute

Vertical Position Relative

Vertical and Horizontal Position Absolute

Clear Tabs

ESC [(p1);...(pn)h

ESC [>(p1);...(pn)h

ESC [(p)j

Set Auto CR on LF

Set Mode (GENICOM)

Horizontal Position Backwards

Vertical Position Backwards

Reset Auto CR on LF

Reset Mode (GENICOM)

Fonts and Print Modes (SGR)

Select Paper Path

ESC [(p)k

ESC [(p1);...(pn)l

ESC [>(p1);...(pn)l

ESC [(P1);...(Pn)m

ESC [(p1)p

ESC [(p1)q

Select Graphics Density

ESC [(p1);(p2);(p3)r

ESC [(p1);(p2)s

ESC [(p1)t

ESC [(p1);(p2);...(p22)u

ESC [(p1);(p2);...(p12)v

ESC [(p1);(p2);…}

ESC [(p)x

Forms Setup

Sets Left and Right Margins

ENA/DIS Oversized/Expanded/Bar Code

Set Horizontal Tabs at Certain Positions

Set Vertical Tabs at Certain Positions

Set Bar Code Parameters

National Character Sets

7265 Programmer’Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pr inter Handshaking

Commands

Description

DC1

PRINTER READY

In serial interface, if the printer is strapped for XON/XOFF handshaking, then

the printer sends DC1 to the host to signal that the printer is ready to accept

data.

In parallel interface, if the printer is strapped for select/ deselect by received

DC1/DC3 codes, then the host sends DC1 to the printer to set the printer

online.

Dec 17

Hex 11

DC3

PRINTER NOT READY

In serial interface, if the printer is strapped for XON/XOFF handshaking, then

the printer sends DC3 to the host to signal that the printer cannot, for the

moment, accept any more data.

In parallel interface, if the printer is strapped for select/ deselect by received

DC1/DC3 codes, then the host sends DC3 to the printer to set the printer to

Standby. In Standby, the printer will accept and acknowledge data from the

interface, but will discard all data received.

Dec 19

Hex 13

ETX

ACK

ETX/ACK COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

In serial interface, if the printer is strapped for ETX/ACK handshaking, then the

host sends the ETX control code at the end of a block of data.

Dec 3

Hex 03

ETX/ACK COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

In serial interface, if the printer is strapped for ETX/ACK handshaking, then the

printer sends an ACK in response to and ETX from the host to indicate that it is

ready to receive more data.

Dec 6

Hex 06

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer Control

Commands Description

SHIFT OUT

You can strap the printer to start either barcode (page 37) or oversized (page 64)

mode, whichever is enabled, on receipt of SO. The ISU status of SO/SI control is

disabled. You can enable SO/SI control from Software Options on the printed menu,

or from the host via the Straps and Options control sequence. See page 14.

Dec 14

Hex 0E

SHIFT IN

If the printer is strapped to turn on barcode or oversized on receipt of SO, then SI

turns barcode (page 37) or oversized (page 64) mode off.

Dec 15

Hex 0F

ESC

ESCAPE

Introduces an escape sequence. The printer evaluates characters following the ESC

character to determine if the sequence is valid. If the sequence is valid, then the

printer responds to the command. If the sequence is not valid, then the printer aborts

the process, discarding at least the first character following ESC.

Dec 27

Hex 1B

ESC P

(DCS)

DEVICE CONTROL STRING

The control function introducer for the device control string structure, which is used to

frame graphics.

Dec 144

Hex 90

ESC [

(CSI)

The CSI character is the control function introducer for the ANSI control sequence.

Control sequences are multi-character control functions that accept parameters.

Dec 155

Hex 9B

ESC \

(ST)

STRING TERMINATOR

Terminates the DCS and the OSC sequence.

Dec 156

Hex 9C

ESC ]

(OSC)

The OSC character is the introducer for straps and options.

Dec 157

Hex 9D

BEL

BEEPER

Dec 7

Hex 07

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands Descripiton

DEL

DELETE

DEL is a printable character, or is a valid graphics data byte if received

in dot g aphics

mode.

Dec 127

Hex 7F

ESC [(p1);

(p2)<SP>~

SELECT EMULATION

If p2 is 0, which is the default, then the current settings in the printer remain in effect

through the emulation change to the extent that selected features are supported in

the target emulation. This affects such things as, font selection, character pitch,

margins, tabs, and so forth. If p2 is 1, then the status of such parameters reverts to

defaults dependent on the selected emulation.

selects

GENICOM ANSI

Tally ANSI

2-21

Reserved

Epson FX286e

selects

0-1

full reset

Example: Select Epson emulation with full reset:

Dec 27 91 50 50 59 49 32 126

Hex 1B 5B 32 32 3B 31 20 7E

ESC [(p1)p

SELECT PAPER PATH

selects

unload current path

unload current path and load tractor 2

unload current path and load tractor 1

Forms in the current path should be torn off before changing paper paths. If

you send a command to change paper paths and there is more paper

downstream of the print head than 1/2 times the current form length or six

inches, whichever is greater, then the printer returns paper to the position that

was current before the command was received, and a fault condition is set.

If you send a command to change paper paths and the target path is the

current path, then the printer executes a form feed. If you load tractor 2

when tractor 2 is not installed, the command will be ignored.

Example: Unload tractor 1 and load tractor 2:

Dec 27 91 49 48 112

Hex 1B 5B 31 30 70

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands Descripiton

ESC c

RESET TO INITIAL STATE

Recalls the user format presently assigned to the current paper path.

Dec 27 99 Hex 1B 63

ENABLE/DISABLE OVERSIZED/EXPANDED/BAR CODE MODES

ESC [(p1)t

p1 Effect

Page

reset special modes

select oversized printing

select expanded printing

select bar code

4-2

3-6

Oversized printing and bar codes are explained in separate chapters. When

expanded printing is selected, the current font is expanded horizontally and vertically

in 100% increments according to expansion factors specified by ESC

[(p1);(p2)<SP>B (see page 11). The range of expansion is 1x through 8x.

Example: select expanded printing

Dec 27 91 50 116

Hex 1B 5B 32 74

ESC [(p1);

(p2)<SP>B

GRAPHIC SIZE MODIFICATION

Sets the size of expanded and oversized characters. The effect of this command on

oversized is explained in a separate chapter.

When expanded print is selected, the argument units for parameters p1 and p2 are

percentages of the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the current font. Parameter

p1 controls the vertical expansion and p2 controls the horizontal expansion. The

argument limits for expanded print are 800;800 (8x the parent font size).

Oversized enables much larger expansions. Parameters are rounded down to the

nearest 100.

Note: This printer goes into expanded mode immediately on receiving this

command. Any text between this sequence and a countermanding ESC [(p1)t

sequence (see page 11) is printed according to the specified expansion.

If height and width are different values, the height will be set the same as the width.

ESC [(p1);

...(pn)h

SET MODE (ANSI)

Effect

auto CR on LF

Dec 27 91 50 48 104

Hex 1B 5B 32 30 68

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands Descripiton

ESC [(p1);

...(pn)l

RESET MODE (ANSI)

Resets mode(s) set by ESC [(p1);..(pn)h.

Effect

reset auto CR on LF

Example: reset auto CR on LF

Dec 27 91 50 48 108

Hex 1B 5B 32 30 6C

ESC [>

SET MODE (GENICOM)

(p1);..(pn)h

This is an ANSI private use sequence.

Effect

proportional print

reserved

80 hex - 9B hex interpreted as C1 control codes

bold mode accomplished by overstrike

select character set 2

Example: set proportional print

Dec 27 91 62 49 104

Hex 1B 5B 3E 31 68

ESC [>

RESET MODE (GENICOM)

(p1);..(pn)l

Resets modes set by ESC [>(pn)h. See the previous command. The parameter

definitions are the same.

Example: reset proportional print

Dec 27 91 62 49 108

Hex 1B 5B 3E 31 6C

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands Description

ESC [(p1);

PAPER SHEAR

(p2);<SP>{

If the paper shear option is installed, then note that the appropriate strap must be set

in the hardware options menu in order for the paper shear to work.

Parameter p1 = 1 selects the paper shear.

Parameter p2 = 1 executes a cutting sequence: If the vertical position is not at top-of-

form, then a form feed is executed. Paper is advanced to the shear position and cut.

Next, it is advanced an inch to eject the sheet that has been cut off; then it is

retracted to the top margin on the following form. The horizontal position following a

shear is the left margin. The shear position should be set from the control panel so

that paper is cut precisely at the perforation. If a non-zero top print reference is

needed, then set the top print reference first and then set the shear position.

Dec 27 91 49 59 49 32 123 Hex 1B 5B 31 3B 31 20 7B

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands Descripiton

ESC ]6;4;

(p3);(p4)

ESC \

STRAPS AND OPTIONS

This command enables downline control of options found at various places in the

printer menus. This includes the Emulation and Software Options menus, as well as

the User-defined Options menu. For details and descriptions, see the User’s

Manual.

p3 =

reset

set

p4 =

auto cr on lf

auto lf on cr

auto cr on vt

auto wrap

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphics Rendition (Fonts and Modes)

Command

ESC [(p1);

...(pn)m

Description

SELECT GRAPHICS RENDITION

Selects print modes and fonts.

Printing Mode

normal printing - resets all modes (but does not affect font selection)

set bold print

set underline

set doublewide

set proportional

10 and 11

Gothic DP

Gothic LQ

Courier DP

Courier LQ

Gothic Italic DP

Gothic Italic LQ

Courier Italic DP

Courier Italic LQ

Wide Gothic DP

cancel bold

cancel underline

cancel doublewide / expanded

cancel proportional

select black ribbon color

select red ribbon color

select green ribbon color

select yellow ribbon color

select blue ribbon color

select magenta ribbon color

select cyan ribbon color

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NATIONAL CHARACTER SET

Command

Description

ESC [(p)x

SELECT NATIONAL CHARACTER SET

Character Set

USA

Germany

French A

Italian

United Kingdom

Spanish

Danish/Norwegian A

Swedish/Finnish D

If a parameter value (p) is not recognized, then the default character set (0 - USA) is

selected.

To use substitutions that have characters in the 80 hex to 95 hex range, first disable

8-bit control code processing, either by escape sequence or from the Emulation

Options Menu. Next, enable character set 2, either by the Straps and Options control

sequence on page 14 or from the Emulation Options menu. This causes ASCII

codes 80 hex - 9F hex to be mapped to printable characters instead of control codes.

Example: To select the United Kingdom character set:

Dec 27 91 55 120 Hex 1B 5B 37 78

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D/N = Danish/Norwegian S/F = Swedish/Finnish

Code

123

124

125

126

155

157

Location H

Character

Set

USA

[

]

{

}

Germany

French A

]

{

Italian

Spanish

}

D/N

Swedish

Figure 2-3 National Character Substitutions 0 - 18

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line/Character Spacing

Command

ESC [(p1); (p2)

<SP> G

Description

LINE/CHARACTER SPACING

Sets the vertical and horizontal pitch in decipoints. Parameter (p1) is the

spacing between lines and (p2) is the spacing between characters.

Unspecified parameters remain at their current values. This command

does not affect oversized printing selected by ESC [1t.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands Description

ESC [(p1);

LINE/CHARACTER SPACING

(p2) <SP> G

p1 = line spacing parameter p2 = character spacing parameter

If you select doublewide printing (ESC [5m), then the printer doubles character

spacing set by this command. If the designed pitch of the current font is 10 cpi and

doublewide is set, then a character spacing argument of 72 results in a pitch of 5 cpi,

at which horizontal segments of line-draw characters are contiguous.

Example: ESC [90;60 <sp> G

sets the vertical spacing to 8 lines per inch and the horizontal spacing to 12

characters per inch. (720 divided by 8 = 90, and 720 divided by 12 = 60).

Dec 27 91 52 48 59 54 48 32 71

Hex 1B 5B 39 30 3B 36 30 20 47

120

CPI

The quick brown fox jumped

The quick brown fox jumped over

The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy

The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog’s back.

Figure 2-4 Effects of Character Spacing Parameters

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Forms Setup

Command

ESC [(p1);

(p2);(p3);(p4)

;(p5)r

Description

FORMS SETUP

Sets top of form and sets form length, as well as top and bottom margins, in decipoints.

Parameter

is form length

720ths

is the top margin,

sets the length of white space between the baseline of the last allowed

line and the end of form.

is the top print reference, and

is the left print reference

Any parameter not specified is assigned its default value. Maximum form length is

15840 decipoints (22 inches).

Default Values

7920 decipoints

0 decipoints

11-inch form

0-inch top margin

0-inch bottom margin

0-inch top print reference

0-inch left print reference

Example:

Set 8-inch form length, one-inch top margin, one-inch bottom margin

Dec 27 91 53 55 54 48 59 55 50 48 59 55 50 48 114

Hex 1B 5B 35 37 36 30 3B 37 32 30 3B 37 32 30 72

Note: Before you send this command, verify that the top print reference is zero in the

target paper path. One way to do this is to park and then load paper in the target path.

The top edge of the paper should line up with the top of the print head. If not, then set

the top print reference to zero from the menu and save the change to the format

associated with the target paper path. You must once again park and load paper in the

target path in order for the new print reference to take effect.

Next, send a command to set the vertical position-absolute to zero. If you do not do

this, then the printer establishes top-of-form at the current top margin, and form

registration is lost.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Superscript/Subscript

Command Description

ESC K

SUBSCRIPT PRINTING

(PLD)

Moves paper 1/2 line below the current line for subscript printing. ESC K is used to

return to the original line following ESC L (superscript).

If 8-bit control code processing is enabled then

Dec 139

Hex 8B

otherwise

Dec 27 75 Hex 1B 4B

ESC L

(PLU)

SUPERSCRIPT PRINTING

Moves paper 1/2 line above the current line for superscript printing. ESC L is used to

return to the original line following ESC K (subscript).

If 8-bit control code processing is enabled then

Dec 140

Hex 8C

otherwise

Dec 27 76 Hex 1B 4C

NOTE: The partial line up does not respect top of form; that is, following a form feed, ESC L causes a partial line

movement upward. Also, partial line down does not respect bottom of form; that is, when printing the last line on

the form, ESC L causes a partial line movement downward.

When printing the last line on a form, do not send a line feed (LF) code to move directly from superscript to

subscript. The LF code will be acted upon as the bottom of form terminator.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Movement

Absolute positions are calculated from the top and left print references without respect to margin

settings. The top of a character cell located at vertical position-absolute 0 is at top print reference.

The left edge of a character cell located at horizontal position-absolute 0 is at the left print

reference. If the default left print reference is current, and if the left tractor position(s) are as

shipped, then this is about 0.6 inches from the left edge of the paper.

Top and left print references are adjustable from the printer menu.

Top

Shee

Extreme

Left Position

Character Printed at Zero Position

CAUTION: Do not attempt reverse paper motion across a perforation, since this may cause the

paper to snag on the print head. Vertical position accuracy is not specified for reverse paper

moves greater than 1.5 inches.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Movement

Commands Description

LINE FEED

Advances the paper one line according to the spacing currently in effect.

Dec 10

Hex 0A

VERTICAL TAB

Advances paper to the next vertical tab setting. If the current print position is at or

beyond the last tab setting, the paper advances to the top of form. If no tabs are set,

then VT is processed according to the status of emulation option strap 14.

Dec 11

Hex 0B

FORM FEED

Advances the paper to the top margin on the next form.

Dec 12

Hex 0C

ESC D

(IND)

INDEX

Advances the paper to the next line. The current column is not changed, regardless

of the status of auto CR on LF.

Dec 132

Hex 84

ESC E

(NEL)

NEXT LINE

The next line character advances the paper to the next line. The current column is

reset to the left margin. Auto CR on LF has no effect.

Dec 133

Hex 85

ESC M

(RI)

REVERSE INDEX

Moves the paper back one line.

Dec 141

Hex 8D

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands Description

ESC [(p)e

VERTICAL POSITION RELATIVE

Advances paper p decipoints. This command enables printing below the bottom

margin of the current form and above the top margin of the following form. The

example below advances the paper 4 1/4 inches.

Example: ESC [3060e

Dec 27 91 51 48 54 48 101

Hex 1B 5B 33 30 36 30 65

ESC [(p)k

VERTICAL POSITION BACKWARDS

Moves the vertical position backwards to (p) decipoints above the current position.

The horizontal position does not change.

If the target position is above the top margin, then the vertical position is the top

margin. If no top margin is set, and the target position is above top-of-form, then the

vertical position is top-of-form.

NOTE: The printer economizes vertical motion with vertical logic seeking, so this

command may cause reverse paper motion in some instances and not in others.

Reverse paper motion can cause problems with some forms.

Example: ESC [1080k moves the vertical position up by 1.5 inches.

Dec 27 91 49 48 56 48 107

Hex 1B 5B 31 30 38 30 6B

ESC [(p)d

VERTICAL POSITION ABSOLUTE

Moves the current print position to p decipoints from the top of the form.

The following example advances the paper to 2 inches below top of form.

Example: ESC [1440d

Dec 27 91 49 52 52 48 100

Hex 1B 5B 31 34 34 30 64

ESC[(p1);

(p2)f

VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL POSITION ABSOLUTE

Moves the print position to any coordinate on the page. Coordinates are measured

in decipoints. Parameter p1 is the vertical coordinate, which is measured from the

top print reference. Parameter p2 is the horizontal coordinate, which is measured

from the left print reference. The computation of absolute positions is not influenced

by margin settings. Top and left print references are adjustable from the control

panel.

You can print characters beyond the left, top, and bottom margin setting, but no

printing is allowed beyond the right margin.

EXAMPLE: ESC [1440;2160f

Prints the next character 2 inches from the top print reference and 3 inches from the

left print reference.

Dec 27 91 49 52 52 48 59 50 49 54 48 102

Hex 1B 5B 31 34 34 30 3B 32 31 36 30 66

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Margins

Use the Forms Setup command, page 2-39, to set vertical margins.

Commands

Description

ESC [(p1);6 (p2)s

SET LEFT AND RIGHT MARGIN

Sets the left and right margin in decipoints; p1 is the left margin and p2 is the

right. Distances are measured from the left print reference. This command

takes effect following the next line terminator (you cannot set margins for the

current line).

EXAMPLE: Set the left margin at 0.4 inch and right margin at 6.9 inches,

making a 6.5-inch print line.

Dec 27 91 50 56 56 59 52 57 54 56 115

Hex 1B 5B 32 38 38 3B 34 39 36 38 73

ASSIGN MARGIN DEFAULTS

ESC [s

Assigns the default parameters. Sets the left margin to zero, right margin to

maximum print line width of the printer. This command takes effect following the

next line terminator.

Dec 27 91 115

Hex 1B 5B 73

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Movement

Commands Descripiton

HORIZONTAL TAB

Causes the current print position to move to the next tab stop. If no tabs are set, then

the current position moves one space. If tab(s) are set but no tab(s) are set between

the active print position and the right margin, then following characters on the line are

either discarded or printed on the next line, depending on the status of auto wrap.

Dec 9

Hex 09

CARRIAGE RETURN

Initiates printing and returns the current print position to the left margin.

Dec 13

Hex 0D

ESC [(p)a

HORIZONTAL POSITION RELATIVE

Advances the current print position by the distance specified. Parameter p is

specified in decipoints.

Example: ESC [1080a advances the print position 1.5 inches.

Dec 27 91 49 48 56 48 97

Hex 1B 5B 31 30 38 30 61

ESC [(p)j

HORIZONTAL POSITION BACKWARDS

Moves the horizontal position (p) decipoints left of the current position.

Actual distance between symbols separated by this command is the argument (p)

minus the current horizontal pitch (text or graphics). For example, if you print an

uppercase E at 10 cpi, move backwards by (p), and print another uppercase E, then

the distance between leading edges of the two characters is (p) - 72 decipoints. If you

print graphics at 72 dpi, move backwards by p, and print another graphics column,

then the distance between the two graphics columns is (p) – 10 decipoints.

This command enables printing left of the left margin. Any data located left of the left

print reference is discarded.

Example: ESC [1080j moves the horizontal position back by 1.5 inches.

Dec 27 91 49 48 56 48 106

Hex 1B 5B 31 30 38 30 6A

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands Description

ESC [(p)` HORIZONTAL POSITION ABSOLUTE

Causes the print position to move (in decipoints) a specified distance from the left

print reference.

Example: ESC [360` Move print head ½” from left print reference.

Dec 27 91 51 54 48 96 Hex 1B 5B 33 36 30 60

BACKSPACE

Prints the data in the print buffer, then moves the print position one character position

to the left.

Dec 8

Hex 08

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tabs

This printer stores tab stops in NVRAM while power is off. Therefore, all tab stops should be cleared before new

stops are set.

Commands

ESC H

Description

SET HORIZONTAL TAB AT CURRENT POSITION

(HTS)

If 8-bit control code processing is enabled then both

Dec 136

Hex 88

otherwise only

Dec 27 72 Hex 1B 48

ESC [(p1)

(p2);..(p22)u

SET HORIZONTAL TABS AT SPECIFIED POSITIONS

Sets up to 22 stops at one time. The value of p1, p2, etc. are in

decipoints (1 inch = 720 decipoints).

Dec 27 91 55 50 48 59 50 56 56 48 117

Hex 1B 5B 37 32 30 3B 32 38 38 30 75

The above example sets tabs at 1 inch and 4 inches. Existing tab stops are not

cleared. Margin settings have no effect on the positions of tab stops.

ESC J

(VTS)

SET VERTICAL TAB AT CURRENT POSITION

If 8-bit control code processing is enabled then both

Dec 138

Hex 8A

otherwise only

Dec 27 74 Hex 1B 4A

ESC [(p1);

SET VERTICAL TABS AT SPECIFIED POSITIONS

(p2);.. (p12)v

Sets vertical tabs at positions p1, p2, p3, etc. Up to 12 stops can be set at one

time. Tab stops are measured in decipoints from the top print reference.

Example: Set tab stops at 4 and 7 inches.

Dec 27 91 50 56 56 48 59 53 48 52 48 118

Hex 1B 5B 32 38 38 30 3B 35 30 34 30 76

CLEAR TABS

ESC [(Ps)g

Effect

clear horizontal tab at current print position

clear vertical tab at current position

clear all horizontal tabs

clear all vertical tabs

Example: Clear all horizontal tabs

Dec 27 91 51 103 Hex 1B 5B 33 67

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dot Graphics

Dot graphics allows you to print individual dots at any position on the page and thus to print

pictures as well as text. When you enter dot graphics, the printer defaults to a dot density of 72

dpi horizontally and vertically, and a line spacing of 12 lpi. Exiting from dot graphics returns the

printer to its prior lpi setting. You can also choose a density of 144 dpih x 72 dpiv. The printer

powers up in low density. The density remains as last set until it is changed, or until power is

turned off.

Each byte of graphics data defines one column of dots that is six dots high. You can think of the

least significant six bits in the byte as controlling the topmost six wires of the print head, with the

first bit controlling the top wire and the sixth bit controlling the sixth wire down. If you wanted to

fire all six wires, then you would send a byte with a decimal value of 63. Byte values of 0 through

31 decimal are interpreted as control codes, so you have to add 64 to any graphics data byte less

than 32 decimal.

You would expect to be able to simply add the value 64 decimal to every graphics data byte; in

other words, just set the seventh bit. This is risky because some variations within the 3000

product family interpret decimal 127, the Delete character, within a graphics sequence. The effect

is to delete everything following the last line terminator. The safest course is:

byte_val < 32 then byte_val = byte_val + 64

WEIGHT

WIRE

Figure 2-5 Dot Column Coding

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sample Basic Program for Dot Coding

Figure 2-6

Dot Graphics Example

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphics Control Functions

The set of control codes that are interpreted while in graphics mode are shown in the following

charts. Bytes less than 32 decimal that are not interpreted as control codes are ignored. The

printer processes valid escape sequences within a graphics data sequence. This is potentially

useful, for instance, in the cases of the absolute and relative position commands. A valid escape

sequence that is not applicable to graphics mode, such as bold printing mode, will be

implemented for text on exiting graphics. If the printer receives a nonvalid escape sequence while

in graphics mode, then it drops out of graphics mode.

Commands

BEL

Description

BELL

Causes the beeper to sound for about 1/2 second.

Dec 7

Hex 07

HORIZONTAL TAB

Causes the print head to move to the next tab stop.

Dec 9

Hex 09

LINE FEED

(NEL)

Graphics next line. Causes printing to move to the left margin on the following line.

If 8-bit control code processing is enabled, then NExt Line does the same thing.

Dec 10 or 133

Hex 0A or 85

VERTICAL TAB

Causes printing to move to the left margin at the next vertical tab stop.

Dec 11

Hex 0B

FORM FEED

Causes printing to move to the top left margin on the following form.

Dec 12 Hex 0C

CARRIAGE RETURN

Causes printing to move to the left margin on the current line. This permits

overprinting the current line.

Dec 13

Hex 0D

IND

INDEX

If 8-bit control code processing is enabled, then a line feed is performed at the

graphics vertical pitch. The horizontal position stays the same.

Dec 132

Hex 84

REVERSE INDEX

If 8-bit control code processing is enabled, then a reverse line feed is performed at

the graphics vertical pitch. The horizontal position stays the same.

Dec 141

Hex 8D

ESC P

ESC \

ENTER DOT GRAPHICS MODE

Also sets line spacing to 1/12 inch so that LF produces contiguous graphics lines.

Dec 27 80 Hex 1B 50

EXIT DOT GRAPHICS MODE

Also restores line spacing to its previously set value.

Dec 27 92 Hex 1B 5C

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands

Description

ESC [(p1)q

GRAPHICS DENSITY

Sets the graphics density. The printer powers up with a graphics density of 72 x 72

dpi; changes are not stored in NVRAM.

horizontal density

72 dpi

vertical density

72 dpi

144 dpi

72 dpi

Dec 27 91 48 113 Hex 1B 5B 30 71

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 2 ANSI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3. ANSI Bar Codes

This chapter describes the characteristics and lists ANSI control sequences for 23 resident bar

code styles. You have to be in ANSI emulation to print the resident bar codes. You can adjust

various bar code attributes including rotation, height, print density, status of the human-readable

line, and element widths. Subject to some constraints based on style and rotation, the human-

readable font is also selectable. For some styles, the printer will calculate checksum characters

for you.

To print a bar code symbol, you need to:

1) Set the printer to ANSI emulation.

2) Send the escape sequence to set the user-adjustable attributes. Always do this at least

once.

3) Send the control sequence to turn on bar code.

4) Send the ASCII representation of symbol data you want to encode.

5) Send the control sequence to turn off bar code.

6) Send a line terminator at some point thereafter.

In bar code parlance, a module is the narrowest nominal width of measure, while an element is a

single bar or space. A character is a group of elements that represents a number, letter, or

punctuation mark. A symbol is a group of characters that can stand alone in terms of being

interpreted by the reader. A symbol always comprises one or more data characters framed by

white spaces known as quiet zones. The symbol frame almost always includes start and stop

characters. Depending on the style, some bar code symbols can also include check characters,

center characters, and guard bars.

Among printers that generate bar codes internally and that also support any user-adjustment of

bar code widths, some enable the specification of module width, while others, such as this one,

enable the adjustment of element widths. From the programmer's point of view, adjustable

module widths tend to guarantee that the ratio among element widths remains correct, while

adjustable element widths afford more flexibility.

When we ship the printer, the ratios among element widths in a given bar code style are within

generic specifications for that style. You can restore these default element widths by performing

an initial setup (ISU) as described in the User's manual. Since this printer lets you specify

element widths independently of each other, it is possible to print bar codes that are outside of

generic specifications, or outside of the limits of your particular reading system, or both. You need

to know the requirements of your system before you program your printer.

Bar codes printed with this printer are suitable for readers designed for low- or medium-density

bar code symbols. Avoid readers with apertures smaller than 7 mils. If bar codes are to be read

with an infrared reader, then you must use a special carbon ribbon.

The examples given in this section use the Code 3-of-9 format.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Before You Begin - Set the Form Length

Programmers tend not to trust form feeds and sometimes use line feeds instead to move from

one form to another. If there is any advantage to that approach, it is that the vertical move will not

depend on the current form length. When printing bar codes on labels, you can greatly simplify

your task by setting a form length that exactly matches the length of your physical form and then

using form feeds to make vertical moves between labels or rows of labels.

If you print nothing but text, then the vertical position following each line feed lies on a grid that is

evenly spaced according to the line feed increment. If you print a bar code symbol, then positions

established by subsequent line feeds may not be on that grid. The vertical position following a bar

code symbol becomes the origin for a subsequent line feed; this new origin must be computed

based on bar code height, and the status of the human-readable line.

If you do not initialize your vertical position with a form feed for each row of labels, then printed

objects may creep cumulatively up or down with respect to the top of your physical form.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Bar Code Parameters

The ANSI control sequence that sets bar code parameters has the format:

Command

ESC

Description

Set Up Bar Code Parameters

[p1;p2;p3;p4;p

5;p6;p7;p8;p9;

p10;p11;p12;p

13}

Determines bar code parameters to be used when bar code mode is enabled.

See following sections.

Dec 27 91 (p1) 59 (p2) 59…(p13)125

Hex 1B 5B (p1) 3B (p2) 3B…(p13) 7D

Bar Code Height

Parameter p2

Wide Bar Width

Parameter p5

Narrow Bar Width

Parameter p4

0123456789

Human Readable

Line Parameter p3

Narrow Space

Width Parameter p6

Wide Space Width

Parameter p7

Figure 3-1 Parts of a Bar Code

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Values of all the adjustable bar code parameters are stored in NVRAM while power is off. You

can restore the bar code attributes to the factory settings by performing an ISU on the printer.

pn Attribute

style

height

human readable line enable

narrow bar width

wide bar width

narrow space width

wide space width

N / A

rotation

p10 horizontal print density

p11 check character

p12 human readable font

p13 height (in 1/24” increments)

General Rules for Assigning Parameters

You can send the sequence to modify bar code parameters any time except when bar code

mode is active.

If you assign a parameter value outside the permissible range, then that parameter value

reverts to the default value.

Values for narrow bars must be less than values for wide bars. Values for narrow spaces

must be less than values for wide spaces. The ratio between wide and narrow elements

should be about 3:1.

As with other ANSI escape sequences that take multiple parameters, you can use the semicolon

as a place holder when you want to change a higher-numbered parameter while leaving lower-

numbered parameters alone. For example, to set the horizontal print density to 60 dpi without

changing any other bar code attributes, you could send:

ESC [;;;;;;;;;0;;}

Semicolons that trail the last specified parameter are optional. For example, to turn off the

human-readable line without changing any other parameters, you could send:

ESC [;;0}

Or, you could send:

ESC [;;0;;;;;;;;;}

Note: The term “default” is misleading when applied to bar code parameters. This printer stores

bar code parameters in nonvolatile RAM while power is off; except for an ISU or an out-of-range

argument, you might never see the effects of the factory defaults. For this reason, your

application should probably initialize all 12 parameters one time before any symbols are sent.

This is particularly true when other bar code applications are sharing the printer.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bar Code Command

Sequences

Command

Description

ESC [3t

ENABLE BAR CODES

Enables Bar Codes with the characteristics set by ESC [(p1);(p2)…}.

ESC [3t selects Bar Code mode and

activates Bar Code printing.

Dec 27 91 51 116

Hex 1B 5B 33 74

ESC [0t

CANCEL OVERSIZED/EXPANDED/BAR CODE MODES

Dec 27 91 48 116

Hex 1B 5B 30 74

SHIFT OUT

Turns off bar code printing, then enters bar code mode again.

Dec 14

SHIFT IN

Hex 0E

turns bar code printing off.

Dec 15 Hex 0F

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

p1 - Bar Code Style

This printer supports the following styles:

Style

Interleaved 2 of 5

Bidirectional 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5

Industrial 2 of 5

Code 3 of 9 (default)

EAN-8

EAN-13

Code 11

Codabar a/t (see note)

Codabar b/n (see note)

Codabar c/* (see note)

Codabar d/e (see note)

UPC-A

UPC-E

Code 93

Code 128 (subsets A, B, and C)

Reserved

MSI

POSTNET

Note: Each of the four Codabar styles will accept any combination of valid start-stop characters

that you send. If you do not send any start-stop characters, then the printer generates start-stop

characters according to the style in force.

p2 – Height

Height of the bar code in 1/12-inch increments. The default is ¾ inch, which corresponds to an

argument of 9.

Caution: In some versions of the printer, the last non-zero value of p13 supplants all subsequent

values of p2 until you ISU that printer. (See page 41.)

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

p3 - Human Readable Enable

An argument of 1 turns on the human-readable line, while 0 turns it off. The default is on. When

the human readable line is enabled, it is printed in the font specified by parameter p12. There is

0.1" between the bottom edge of the bar code and the top of the characters in the human-

readable line.

Element Widths

The default element widths are the narrowest that we recommend for consistent readability.

The argument units for horizontal bar code element widths are 1/120 inch. The print wire diameter

is 1/72 inch; a printed dot is about 1/60 inch in diameter. This is the finest line that the printer can

make. The printer accepts an element width of 1 as a valid argument, but the actual width of the

resulting element is 1/60 inch, the same as if you had specified a width of 2.

If the element width argument is greater than 2, then the printer rounds down odd numbers. A

width argument of 5 produces the same result as a width argument of 4.

p4 - Narrow Bar Width

Argument units are 1/120 inch if the bar code is horizontal (0^oor 180^orotation) or 1/144 inch if the

bar code is vertical (90^oor 270^orotation). The default is 2.

p5 - Wide Bar Width

Argument units are 1/120-inch increments if the bar code is horizontal or 1/144 inch if the bar

code is vertical. The default is 6.

p6 - Narrow Space Width

Argument units are 1/120-inch increments if the bar code is horizontal or 1/144 inch if the bar

code is vertical. The default is 2.

p7 - Wide Space Width

Argument units are 1/120-inch increments if the bar code is horizontal or 1/144 inch if the bar

code is vertical. The default is 6.

Wide space and wide bar are both set to the smaller of the two values. This sets the proportion

of the large to small the same for spaces as it is for bars.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other Parameters

p9 – Rotation

Sets the absolute rotation in 90 degree increments. If parameter p12 = 0, then the human-

readable font is shown in the following table:

Rotation

no rotation (default)

HR Font if p12 = 0

current font

no rotation

270^orotation

no rotation

special bar code HR font

270^orotation

Rotation 0

Rotation 1

*1234* *1234*

1234

1 2 3 4

* 1 2 3 4 *

R o t a t i o n 3

Figure 3-2 Effects of Rotation Parameters

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

p10 - Horizontal Resolution

A value of 0 is 60 dots per inch, while a value of 1 is 1/120 dots per inch. The default depends on

the style in force. EAN and UPC styles default to 1. All other styles default to 0.

Note: This parameter affects bar codes printed at 0^oor 180^orotation only. If you select the higher

resolution, then bar codes are darker and are printed at a somewhat slower speed.

p11 - Check Character Enable

N / A

p12 - Human Readable Font

N / A

p13 - Height in 1/24-inch Increments

Normally, bar code height is specified in 1/12-inch increments by p2. Only specify p13 if your job

requires the associated higher resolution of bar code height. A non-zero value of p13 supplants

the value of p2.

Caution: In some versions of the printer, a non-zero value of p13 supplants all subsequent

values of p2 until you ISU that printer. To be on the safe side, if you do not plan to use p13, then

set p13 to 0. NOTE: Bar code height is limited to 10 inches.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delimiters

A bar code delimiter is a character or control function that tells the printer where one bar code symbol ends and

an adjacent symbol begins. Different bar code styles accept different delimiters, which might be spaces,

commas, asterisks, horizontal tabs, or horizontal position-relative commands. Valid delimiters for the various

styles are listed in the Bar Code Style Characteristics section.

There is always a minimum one-fourth inch of white space called the quiet zone on either side of a bar code

symbol, so there is always an irreducible half-inch space between adjacent symbols, no matter which delimiter is

used. The space character occupies an additional tenth of an inch. Neither the comma nor the asterisk imposes

any additional space between symbols. Asterisks are valid delimiters in Code 3 of 9 (style 4) only, and are

normally used in pairs.

110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0;9;1}";

120 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";

140 LPRINT "001234,001234";

150 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t";

160 LPRINT "comma delimiter"

170 LPRINT

'height 3/4", hr = on, interleaved 2 of 5

'turn on bar code

'comma delimiter

'turn off bar code

180 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";

190 LPRINT "001234 001234";

200 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t";

210 LPRINT "space delimiter"

220 LPRINT

'turn on bar code

'space delimiter

'turn off bar code

230 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4}";

240 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";

250 LPRINT "*1234**1234*";

260 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t";

270 LPRINT

'style 4 = 3 of 9

'turn on bar code

'asterisk delimiter

'turn off bar code

280 LPRINT "asterisk delimiters are used in pairs"

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

!#/E" !#/E"

Interleaved 2 of 5, comma delimiter

!#/E" !#/E"

Interleaved 2 of 5, space delimiter

*1234* *1234*

*1234*

Asterisk delimiters are used in pairs, 3 of 9

Figure 3-3 Comma, Space, and Asterisk Delimiters

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Tab Delimiter

The HT control code (09) is a valid delimiter in all bar code styles. The leading quiet zone of a subsequent

symbol begins at the first tab stop right of the trailing quiet zone of the current symbol. This is evident in the

sample, where the quiet zone of the second symbol begins at the third tab stop.

Since this printer stores tabs in nonvolatile RAM while power is off, and since the control sequence that sets

horizontal tabs does not clear existing tabs, you should clear all tabs before setting tabs. Note also that new tab

stops do not take effect until you send a line terminator; in other words, you cannot set tabs for the current line.

The superfluous tab stops in the following example are included to show you how the function works. If you use

horizontal tabs for delimiters, then set no more tab stops than you plan to use.

100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4;9;1}";

110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3g";

‘3 of 9

'clear all h_tabs

120 'set horizontal tabs at 1/2-inch intervals

130 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[360;720;1080;1440;1800;2160u"

150 FOR K = 1 TO 6

'show where the tabs are

160 LPRINT CHR$(9);"T";

170 NEXT K

180 LPRINT

190 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";

200 LPRINT "1234";CHR$(9);"1234";

210 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t";

'turn on bar code

'turn off bar code

*1234* *1234*

Figure 3-4 Horizontal Tab Delimiter

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Position - Relative Delimiter

The horizontal position-relative command is a valid delimiter in all bar code styles except POSTNET.

ESC [(Pn)a

The argument units for this command are decipoints (1/720 inch), which the printer rounds off to the nearest

1/120 inch. This command is a valid delimiter even when issued with an argument of zero.

110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4;9;1}";

120 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";

140 LPRINT "1234";

'height 3/4", hr = on

'turn on bar code

'send a symbol

150 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[720a";

160 LPRINT "1234";

'hp_relative 1 inch

'send a symbol

170 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t";

180 LPRINT "hp_rel delimiter"

'turn off bar code

*1234 *1234

1234

hp_rel delimiter

Figure 3-5 Horizontal Position-Relative Delimiter

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delimiters and Vertical Bar Codes

If you rotate a bar code 90^oor 270^o, then space imposed by delimiters is not rotated, but is applied horizontally, as

the sample shows. The symbol dimensions that used to be horizontal are shortened to 120/144 of what they used

to be; this includes the quiet zones.

100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4;9;1}";

110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3g";

‘3 of 9

'clear all h_tabs

120 'set horizontal tabs at 1/2-inch intervals

130 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[360;720;1080;1440;1800;2160u"

140 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0;9;1;;;;;;2}";

150 FOR K = 1 TO 6

160 LPRINT CHR$(9);"T";

170 NEXT K

'show where the tabs are

180 LPRINT

190 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";

'turn on bar code

200 LPRINT "1234";CHR$(9);"5678";

210 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t"

220 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";

'turn off bar code

'turn on bar code

230 LPRINT "2345";CHR$(9);"6789";

240 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t"

'turn off bar code

Figure 3-6 Vertical Bar Code Symbols

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Calculating Characters per Inch

We show characters per inch at the default element widths and 0^o/180^orotation for each style in

the following chapter. All of our numbers ignore the quiet zones; you need to allow 1/2 inch per

symbol for the horizontal rotations.

Defining characters per inch for fixed-length codes is straightforward in that the start-stop and

center characters always take up the same portion of length of the symbol. The styles that have

center characters are all fixed-length.

For variable-length codes, net characters per inch depends on the number of data characters in

the symbol. The overhead imposed by start-stop characters is the same whether a symbol

represents 1 data character or 10, so the net cpi is greater for longer symbols. We show the

overhead imposed by start-stop characters separately for the variable length codes.

The default element widths are the narrowest that we recommend. If you use wider element

widths and maintain a 3:1 ratio of wide elements to narrow elements, then you can extrapolate

characters-per-inch for wider symbols. If you depart from the 3:1 ratio, then it's simpler for you to

print test symbols and derive formulae based on what you measure than it is for us to tell you how

to do the computation for each style.

One way to determine the combined length of start-stop characters for a variable-length symbol is

to print two symbols, one with twice as many data characters as the other. Measure the shorter

symbol and call this L1; measure the longer symbol and call this L2. The combined length of the

start-stop characters is:

d = (2 x L1) - L2

To summarize, when using our cpi figures to predict the length of a symbol, remember:

•

Allow for two quiet zones per symbol.

For variable-length symbols, allow the combined start-stop character length for each symbol.

If you use a check character, then allow for the check character.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bar Code Style Characteristics

The following pages show specific information about the various styles. A NULL character is a

combination of bars and spaces unique to a particular style that is printed when a nonvalid

character is encountered in received bar code symbol data. A null character in the symbol shows

up as a diamond in the human-readable line if the HRL is enabled.

Interleaved 2 of 5 (Style 0)

Bars per unit (2 characters): 5 dark bars and 5 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9

Start character: 2 dark bars and 2 light bars Stop character: 2 dark bars and 1

light bar

Center character code: None

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: Variable

Check digit: None.

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters: Currently selected font, special HR font, special OCR-A/OCR-B

font (120 DPI only)

CPI at default element widths: 6.857

Combined start-stop character length: 0.167"

Bidirectional/Industrial 2 of 5 (Styles 1 and 3)

Bars per character: 5 dark bars and 4 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9

Start/Stop characters: 2 dark bars and 1 light bar

Center character code: None

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: Variable

Check digit: None

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters: Currently selected font, special HR font, special OCR-A/OCR-B

font (120 DPI only)

CPI at default element widths: 4.3

Combined start-stop character length: Style 1 = 0.319", Style 3 = 0.139"

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Matrix 2 of 5 (Style 2)

Bars per character: 3 dark bars and 2 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9

Start/Stop characters: 3 dark bars and 2 light bars

Center character code: None

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: Variable

Check digit: None

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters: Currently selected font, special HR font, special OCR-A/OCR-B

font (120 DPI only)

CPI at default element widths: 6.0

Combined start-stop character length: 0.278"

Code 3 of 9 (Style 4)

Bars per character: 5 dark bars and 4 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9, upper case letters A through Z characters - . $ / + %

and the space character

Start/Stop characters: Yes

Center character code: None

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: Variable

Check digit: None

Delimiters: Comma, asterisk (use in pairs--one before the bar code symbol and

one following it), horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters: Currently selected font, special HR font, special OCR-A/OCR-B

font (120 DPI only)

CPI at default element widths: 3.78

Combined start-stop character length: 0.514"

72655 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN-8 (Style 5)

Bars per character: 2 dark bars and 2 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9

Start/Stop characters: 2 dark bars and 1 light bar

Center character code: Yes

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: 8

Check digit: The check digit can be

supplied by the data source.

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters (without guard bars): Currently selected font, special HR font,

special OCR-A/OCR-B font (120 DPI only), HR characters (with guard bars):

OCR-B font

CPI at default element widths: 7.385

EAN-13 (Style 6)

Bars per character: 2 dark bars and 2 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9

Start/Stop characters: 2 dark bars and 1 light bar

Center character code: Yes

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: 13

Check digit: The check digit can be

supplied by the data source.

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters (without guard bars): Currently selected font, special HR font,

special OCR-A/OCR-B font (120 DPI only), HR characters (with guard bars):

OCR-B font

CPI at default element widths: 8.283

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 11 (Style 7)

Bars per character: 3 dark bars and 2 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9 and the dash character

Start/Stop characters: Yes

Center character code: None

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: Variable

Check digit: If needed, it must be generated by the data source

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters: Currently selected font, special HR font, special OCR-A/OCR-B

font (120 DPI only)

CPI at default element widths: 6.00

Combined start-stop character length: 0.306"

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Codabar A/t, B/n, C/*, D/e (9, 10, 11, 12)

Bars per character: 4 dark bars and 3 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9 and the four additional characters :/ . +

Start/Stop characters: Yes (A,B,C,D/A,B,C,D,T,N,*,E)

Center character code: None

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: Variable

Check digit: If needed, it must be generated by the data source

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters: Currently selected font, special HR font, special OCR-A/OCR-B

font (120 DPI only)

CPI at default element widths: 5.05

Combined start-stop character length: 0.458"

UPC-A (Style 13)

Bars per character: 2 dark bars and 2 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9

Start/Stop characters: 2 dark bars and 1 light bar

Center character code: Yes

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: 12

Check digit: The check digit can

be supplied by the data source

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters: Currently selected font, special HR

CPI at default element widths: 7.64

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC-E (Style 14)

Ten digits must be entered as input. The first five represent a vendor number and the last five

represent a product number. Only 6 of the 10 input digits are encoded in the bar code symbol.

The six characters to be encoded in the symbol are determined as follows:

If the vendor number (first five digits) ends in 000, 100, or 200, then the product number (second

five digits) must be between 00000 and 00999. The six digits encoded are the first two characters

of the vendor number followed by the last three characters of the product number, followed by the

third character of the vendor number. (1st, 2nd, 8th, 9th, 10th, 3rd)

1. If the vendor number ends in 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, or 900, then the product number

must be between 00000 and 00099. The six digits encoded are the first three characters of

the vendor number followed by the last two characters of the product number, followed by a

“3”. (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 9th, 10th, “3” )

2. If the vendor number ends in 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90, then the product number

must be between 00000 and 00009. The six digits encoded are the first four characters of the

vendor number followed by the last character of the product number, followed by a “4”. (1st,

2nd, 3rd, 4th, 10th, “4”)

3. If the vendor number does not end in zero, then the product number must be between 00005

and 00009. The six digits encoded are all five digits of the vendor number followed by the last

character of the product number. (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 10th)

Bars per character: 2 dark bars and 2 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9

Start/Stop characters: 2 dark bars and 1 light bar

Center character code: None

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: 10

Check digit: Automatically generated by the printer and used to check parity. It is

not encoded in the bar code symbol.

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters (without guard bars): Currently selected font, special HR font,

special OCR-A/OCR-B font (120 DPI only) HR characters (with guard bars):

OCR-B font

CPI at default element widths: 7.2

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 93 (Style 15)

Bars per character: 3 dark bars and 3 light bars

Character set: All 128 ASCII characters

Start/Stop characters: Yes. (Stop character has 4 dark bars and 3 light bars)

Center character code: None

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: No

Characters per symbol: Variable

Check digit: Always required. Must be generated by data source. See page 58

Delimiters: Horizontal tab. (When no tabs are defined, a space is inserted.),

hp_relative

HR characters: Currently selected font, special HR font, special OCR-A/OCR-B

font (120 DPI only)

CPI at default element widths: 6.85

Combined start-stop character length: 0.333"

Code 128 (Style 16)

Bars per character: 3 dark bars and 3 light bars

Character set: Any of 3 subsets. The printer automatically shifts among subsets

based on the data that you send. Subset A --All standard alphanumeric

keyboard characters, control characters and special characters Subset B --All

standard alphanumeric keyboard characters, lower case alpha characters and

special characters Subset C --Set of 100 digit pairs from 00 to 99

Start/Stop characters: Yes

Center character code: None

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: Variable

Check digit: Automatically generated by the printer. (Cannot be disabled.)

Delimiters: Horizontal tab. (When no tabs are defined, a space is inserted.),

hp_relative

Automatic data compression and subset selection

CPI at default element widths: 11.07

Combined start-stop character length: 0.583"

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MSI (Style19)

Bars per character: 4 dark bars and 4 light bars

Character set: 0 through 9

Start characters: 1 dark bar and 1 light bar Stop characters: 2 dark bars and 1

light bar

Center character code: None

NULL character: Yes

Intercharacter gap: None

Characters per symbol: Variable

Check digit: The check digit

can be supplied by the data source

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab, hp_relative

HR characters: Currently selected font, special HR font, special OCR-A/OCR-B

font (120 DPI only)

CPI at default element widths: 3.8

Combined start-stop character length: 0.153"

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POSTNET (Style 50)

You cannot adjust POSTNET bar code attributes with ESC[(p1);..(p12)}. All attribute parameters

except the style parameter (p1) are ignored by POSTNET, although they are processed, saved,

and would apply to a subsequent bar code of another style if not overwritten. To select

POSTNET, you need to send only ESC [50}. You cannot print human-readable characters with

this bar code style.

There are three variations of POSTNET. They are ZIP, ZIP+4, and ABC. The printer determines

which variation is being called for by the number of characters in the symbol string. Legal

characters are the numerals 0 - 9 (30 hex - 39 hex) and the dash symbol (2D hex), which is

ignored. Any other printable characters in the symbol string cause an error character (diamond) to

be printed.

ZIP

ZIP+4 9 digits plus 1 check digit

ABC 11 digits plus 1 check digit

5 digits plus 1 check digit

The check digit is the digit that makes the sum of the digits in the symbol string, including the

check digit, evenly divisible by 10. For example, if you send the ZIP symbol string "12345", then

the sum of those five digits is 15, so "123455" would be the complete ZIP symbol.

If you do not send a check digit, then the printer computes it and prints it. If you do send a check

digit, the printer compares your check digit with its internal computation; and if the two numbers

do not agree, then an error character is printed.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bars per character: 2 tall bars and 3 short bars

Character set: 0 through 9

Start characters: 1 tall bar

Stop characters: 1 tall bar

Center character code: None

NULL character: diamond symbol

Intercharacter gap: Yes

Characters per symbol:

ZIP - 5 + 1 check character

ZIP+4 - 9 + 1 check character

ABC - 11 + 1 check character

Check digit: yes.

If a check digit is not sent, then the printer adds it.

If a check digit is sent, then the printer verifies it.

If a user-supplied check digit is wrong, then an error character is printed.

Delimiters: Space, comma, horizontal tab

HR characters: none

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Calculating the Checksum for Code 3 of 9

A 3 of 9 symbol is a variable-length string which can include the digits 0 - 9, uppercase A - Z, and

six additional punctuation characters. The values used to compute the checksum for a 3 of 9

symbol are the locations of individual characters in the unique 3 of 9 character table. Your

program will need to refer to a 3 of 9 look-up table to acquire values for the characters you want

to encode, and again to convert the computed checksum back to a valid 3 of 9 character.

The check digit is the modulus 43 sum of all the character values in a given symbol.

1. Compute the check character for the character string:

12345ABCDE/

2. Sum the values of the characters based on their locations in the 3 of 9 character table:

1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 10 + 11 + 12 + 13 + 14 + 40 = 115

3. Compute the modulus 43 of the sum:

115/43 = 2 Remainder 29

4. The check character is the character corresponding to location 29 in the 3 of 9 character

table, which is T. Send to the printer:

12345ABCDE/T

Code 3 of 9 Character Table

- (minus sign)

. (period)

(space)

Calculating the Checksum for CODE 93

A Code 93 symbol consists of a start code, a variable number of data characters, two check digits

(referred to as "C" and "K"), and a stop code.

The values used to compute the checksum for a Code 93 symbol are the locations of individual

characters in the Code 93 character table. Check digit "C" is the modulo 47 sum of the character

values and a weighting sequence, where the weights from right to left are in the sequence 1, 2,

3...19, 20, 1, 2, 3...19, 20....

Check digit "K" is the modulo 47 sum of the character values and a weighting sequence, where

the weights from right to left, starting with the check character "C", are in the sequence

1, 2, 3...14, 15, 1, 2, 3...14,15....

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following example illustrates the calculation of the check digits for the symbol CODE 93.

Data

"C"

"K"

Data Values

C Weights

K Weights

1) For "C", sum the products of the (C WEIGHTS * DATA VALUES).

(1 * 3) + (2 * 9) + (3 * 38) + (4 * 14) + (5 * 13) + (6 * 24) + (7 * 12) = 484

2) Divide 484 by 47.

484 / 47 = 10 remainder 14.

3) Therefore, the value of "C" is 14, which corresponds to character E.

4) For "K", sum the products of the (K WEIGHTS * DATA VALUES), starting with the newly

calculated "C" digit.

(1*14) + (2*3) + (3*9) + (4*38) + (5*14) + (6*13) + (7*24) + (8*12) = 611

5) Divide 611 by 47.

611 / 47 = 13 remainder 0

6) The value of "K" therefore is 0, corresponding to character 0. Send to the printer:

CODE 93E0

The Code 93 character table is the same as the Code 3 of 9 character table, except that there are

four additional “control characters” at the end.

Code 93 Character Table

- (minus sign)

. (period)

(space)

<CTRL> $

<CTRL> %

<CTRL> /

<CTRL> +

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 93 Checksums for Full ASCII

You can send any of the 128 ASCII characters verbatim in a Code 93 symbol. You would not

need to worry about Code 93 control codes if you did not need to compute checksums.

The four control characters in the Code 93 character table do not correspond to any byte values

sent to the printer, but instead refer to “precedence codes” that the printer generates. If you send

the printer a lowercase “a” in a Code 93 symbol, for instance, then the printer prints bars and

spaces that correspond to the <CTRL> + code in front of bars and spaces that correspond to the

uppercase “A”. The reader then interprets this character combination as a lowercase “a”.

So far, this process is transparent both to routines sending symbol strings to the printer and to

routines receiving decoded data from the reader. When ASCII characters are represented as

character combinations, however, the reader expects to see a checksum based on the values of

these combinations; this is the reason that the control codes are assigned values in the Code 93-

character table. The following example illustrates the calculation of the check digits for the

symbol Cat :

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checksum calculation for the symbol Cat

Data

<CTRL> +

"C"

"K"

Data Values

C Weights

K Weights

1) For "C", sum the products of the (C WEIGHTS * DATA VALUES).

(1 * 29) + (2 * 46) + (3 * 10) + (4 * 46) + (5 * 12) = 395

2) Divide 395 by 47.

395 / 47 = 8 remainder 19.

Therefore, the value of "C" is 19, which corresponds to character J.

3) For "K", sum the products of the (K WEIGHTS * DATA VALUES), starting with the newly

calculated "C" digit.

(1*19) + (2*29) + (3*46) + (4*10) + (5*46) + (6*12) = 557

4) Divide 557 by 47.

611 / 47 = 11 remainder 40

5) The value of “K” therefore is 40, corresponding to character /. Send to the printer:

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 93 Full ASCII Table

Code

ASCII

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

space

(

)

[

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

{

;

]

}

DEL

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 3 ANSI Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4. ANSI Oversized Font

This chapter describes the characteristics and lists the ANSI control sequences for the rotatable

oversized font, a unique sans-serif font with character shapes designed to accommodate very

large expansions. This is an industrial-strength feature. Horizontal resolution is held to 120 dpi to

enable oversized printing at carriage speeds of up to 50 inches per second. Combined with

vertical logic seeking, this enables the 7265 to print complex mixes of character sizes and

rotations at creditable throughputs.

The oversized font is monospaced only. ANSI print modes: bold, underscored, doublewide, and

proportional have no effect. You can print characters 20 hex through 7F hex; characters above

this range are ignored. User-defined character substitutions do not work in oversized, so you

cannot use the IBM line-draw characters. The resident international character substitutions work

the same as in normal text.

In contrast to the oversized function on earlier products, the 7265 interprets escape sequences

and control codes within an oversized string. As of this writing, however, we recommend that you

exit oversized before sending any other control functions.

To maintain compatibility with existing printers, the 7265 printer does not back paper up to print

oversized characters on the current baseline. If you enter an oversized mode and immediately

print one character, then the top of the character is at the vertical position that was current when

you entered oversized. This is no problem if all characters on a line are the same size. To mix

oversized with either normal type or with different expansions on the same baseline, however,

you will need to write a routine to find the baseline. We cover this later in this chapter.

Some of the oversized control sequences are redundant. The nonrotatable controls that let you

optionally toggle oversized with SHIFT OUT and SHIFT IN are retained for compatibility with older

printers. You could reasonably choose to use only the escape sequences for rotatable oversized

(ESC [(Ps)| ) for new applications.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control Function Summary

Control Function

Description

Activate Oversized, Expanded, Barcode

Exit Oversized, Expanded, Barcode

Cancel Oversized, Expanded, Barcode

Non-rotatable Oversized

ESC [0t

ESC [1t

ESC [2t

Expanded Printing

ESC [Pv;Ph<sp>B

ESC[0|

ESC[p1|

Set Character Size

Exit Oversized

Set Oversized

Oversized Control Functions

Commands Description

ACTIVATE OVERSIZED / EXPANDED / BAR CODE

Dec 14

Hex 0E

EXIT OVERSIZED / EXPANDED / BAR CODE

Dec 15

Hex 0F

ESC [0t

CANCEL OVERSIZED / EXPANDED / BAR CODE

Cancels oversized, whether set with ESC [1t or ESC [(Ps)|, and also expanded and

bar code modes. This command does not clear the oversized dimensions set by ESC

[(Pv);(Ph)<sp>B.

Dec 27 91 48 116

Hex 1B 5B 30 74

ESC [1t

ESC [2t

NON-ROTATABLE OVERSIZED

Included for compatibility with older products. Use if you want to toggle oversized with

SHIFT OUT and SHIFT IN.

Dec 27 91 49 116

Hex 1B 5B 31 74

EXPANDED PRINTING

Selects expanded (as opposed to the oversized) printing at the current

expansion factor. Dec 27 91 50 116 Hex 1B 5B 32 74

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands Description

ESC

SET CHARACTER SIZE

[Pv;Ph<sp>B

Sets the expansion of oversized characters in percentage points. Pv is the vertical

expansion and Ph is the horizontal expansion. The parent font is a 10-point font.

Dimensions established by this sequence are stored in nonvolatile RAM while power is

off.

Caution: Any text between receipt of this command and a countermanding mode

selection command, either ESC [(Ps)| or ESC[(Ps)t, will be printed in expanded mode.

If you do not want this to happen, then you must follow this command immediately with

a mode selection command.

The range of valid parameters (in the sense that a valid parameter does not abort the

escape sequence) is 0 <= Pn < 32767. The printer rounds off dimension parameters

as follows:

If Pn < 100, then Pn = 100

If 100 < Pn < 18700, then Pn is rounded down to the nearest 100.

If Pn >= 18700, then Pn = 18700

Example - to set 20-point type at 1:1 aspect ratio:

Dec 27 91 50 48 48 59 50 48 48 32 66

Hex 1B 5B 32 30 30 3B 32 30 30 20 42

ESC

[0|

EXIT OVERSIZED

Dec 27 91 48 125

Hex 1B 5B 31 7C

ESC

[p1|

SET OVERSIZED

p1 = 1-4

Dec 27 91 49-52 124

Hex 1B 5B 31-34 7C

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Oversized Versus Expanded

There are two ANSI functions that print characters scaled according to the Graphics Size Modification

parameters. Both expanded and oversized are standard features with this printer. You can get into expanded

mode accidentally when you send the Graphic Size Modification sequence.

100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[720e";

110 LPRINT "Expanded ";

120 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[400;400 B";

130 LPRINT "ABCj"

'vp_relative

'graphic size mod

'drops into expanded

'cancel mode

140 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t";

150 LPRINT "Oversized ";

160 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[1|";

170 LPRINT "ABCj"

'set oversized

'cancel mode

180 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t"

Figure 4-1 Expanded and Oversized

Expanded mode is based on the current font, is limited to 8x the parent font size, and propagates

up from the baseline. Reverse paper motion occurs for vertical expansions. The horizontal

resolution reflects the current font selection. If you send a line feed character while in expanded

mode, then the paper advances by the current vertical expansion factor times the current line-

feed increment.

Oversized is based on a unique font, is rotatable, expandable to 1870x, and propagates down

from the top of the character cell. The resolution is always 120 dpih x 144 dpiv. If you send a line

feed character while in oversized, then paper advances five dot rows for 0^orotation, or

nine dot rows for 270^orotation. The scaling algorithms for the oversized function are

obviously better.

Setting the Expansion

The size of the parent oversized font is 10 points (12 cpi). You can set the horizontal and vertical

dimensions of oversized characters separately in increments of 100% of the parent font size.

Limits are 100% to 18,700%. The larger number corresponds to an uppercase M about 18.7

inches high. The control sequence that sets the expansion is the ANSI Graphic Size Modification:

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ESC [(pv);(ph)<SP>B

where (pv) is the vertical expansion, (ph) is the horizontal expansion, and <SP> is the space

character (20 hex).

For 0^orotation, you can think of parameter (pv) as 10 times the point size of the

oversized character. If you set a 600 x 600 expansion and print an uppercase “E” at zero rotation,

then the resulting character will nearly match the 60-point Helvetica “E” on a typesetter's scale.

A sideways character shares neither the size nor the aspect ratio of a vertical character printed at

the same expansion factors. Relationships between expansion and character dimensions for

270^orotation reflect differences in the horizontal and vertical resolutions of the printer in

oversized mode.

Remember to always follow the graphic size modification command immediately with either ESC

[0t or the desired oversized mode selection if you do not want to drop into expanded mode.

Device Timeout with Very Large Characters

Normally, one byte of data in the printer's input buffer represents one text character, which takes

milliseconds to print. If our host creates a huge character using dot graphics, then one byte of

data in the buffer corresponds to one dot column. If we set oversized, however, then one byte of

data can command the printer to render several hundred thousand dot columns. A big oversized

character can take a while to print.

If we fill the printer's input data buffer while a big oversized character is printing, then the printer

goes BUSY. The big character, as well as a buffer full of following objects, has to be printed

before the printer goes READY again.

If the host now tries for some period of time to send data to the printer without seeing a READY at

the interface, then the host might decide that the printer is not working, show you a device

timeout message, and abort the data transfer.

This same possibility exists with large bar codes, and we discuss remedies in the ANSI Bar Code

chapter.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What is a Character Cell?

A character cell is the rectangular array of locations at which dots can be printed to form one

character.

All character cells for a given monospaced font at a given pitch are the same size. If you print a

line of characters with no countermanding motion instructions, then no character cell will impinge

horizontally on the character cell of an adjacent character. You can determine character cell width

in a monospaced font by measuring the distance from the leading edge of, say, an uppercase “E”

to the leading edge of an adjacent uppercase “E”.

In an impact-matrix printer font, the printed portion of a character is often centered horizontally in

the character cell. There might be a fixed number of dot columns on either end of the character

cell that are never printed. This is analogous to the side bearings in a typeset character.

Figure 4-2 Character Cells

In the oversized font, on the other hand, characters are left-justified in the cells. This lets you print

a larger character when you are printing, say, one huge character on a sheet. The 7265 printer

prints as much of an oversized character as will fit between the margins. If your character is going

to be clipped at the right margin, then you might rather clip the side bearing than clip a printed

portion of that character.

In the oversized font, the topmost dot in the uppercase “E”, for instance, is centered on the upper

boundary of the character cell. The lowest dot on the descender of the lowercase “j” is centered

on the lower boundary of the character cell.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Oversized Character Dimensions – 0^o

The width of an oversized character cell is 0.72 decipoints times the

horizontal expansion factor. In thousandths of an inch, it is the same as the horizontal expansion

factor. If you set a horizontal expansion of 1000, then characters will be 1 inch, or 720 decipoints,

apart.

Figure 4-3 Vertical Character Dimensions

The height of an oversized character cell is 0.9 decipoints times the

vertical expansion factor. In thousandths of an inch, it is 1.25 times the vertical expansion factor.

If you set a vertical expansion of 1000, then the top of the uppercase “E” is 1.25 inches, or 900

decpoints, from the bottom of the lowercase “j”.

The distance from the top of an oversized character cell to the baseline

is 0.7 decipoints times the vertical expansion factor. Top of the character cell means the upper

boundary of the cell before it was rotated.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Oversized Character Dimensions - 270^o

The width of a character cell is 0.6 decipoints times the horizontal

expansion factor. Width means the dimension that is left-to-right as you read the character.

The height of a character cell is 1.08 decipoints times the vertical

expansion factor. Height means the dimension that is vertical as you read the character.

Figure 4-4 Sideways Character Dimensions

The distance from the top of the character cell to the baseline is 0.76

decipoints times the vertical expansion factor. Top-of-cell means the upper boundary of the

character cell as you read the character.

When printing strings of sideways characters, the printer adds horizontal space between

character cells. This space is equal to 0.36 decipoints times the vertical expansion factor.

Vertical Position-Relative in Oversized

Normally, the origin of a vertical position-relative move is the current position. If the last object

printed on the current line was an oversized character, however, then the origin of a vertical

position-relative move is the top of that character cell, where top-of-cell means the character cell

boundary that is uppermost on the paper. This is true whether or not you are still in oversized

when the vertical position-relative command is sent.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Implementing the Line Feed Function - 0^o

A good technique is to exit oversized with ESC [0t and send a vertical and horizontal position

absolute command:

ESC [(Pv);(Ph)f

where (Pv) is decipoints from the top print reference and (Ph) is decipoints from the left print

reference. The logic seeking of the printer minimizes redundant paper motion associated with

position-absolute commands. You could also use vertical position-relative to implement line

feeds.

Try a line feed increment of 1.2 decipoints times the vertical expansion

factor.

If you send a line feed character while in oversized, then paper advances five dot rows for the 0^o

rotation.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Spacing and Intercharacter Spacing - 270

If you print sideways text, then the vertical move that otherwise corresponded to a line feed now

sets the distance from the leading edge of one character cell to the leading edge of the next

character cell (as you read the characters). A good starting value for this move is the character

cell width, which is 0.6 decipoints times the horizontal expansion factor.

Strings of sideways characters propagate left-to-right across the portrait page. The printer makes

“ line feeds” for you by inserting space between the trailing cell boundary of the previous

character and the leading cell boundary of the next character. This space is 0.36 decipoints times

the vertical expansion factor, which is generous line spacing.

If this line spacing is not satisfactory, then send sideways text one character at a time, preceded

by a locating command for each character. If you use the resident line spacing for sideways lines,

then you will probably use a character array to rotate text. In that case, remember to fill your array

with space characters (20 hex) before you copy strings into it.

7265 Programmer’s Manual

Chapter 4 ANSI Oversized

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A. Commands and Exceptions

Supported Control Codes and Escape Sequences

ACK

Acknowledge

BEL

Bell

Back Space

Carriage Return

Control String Introducer, ESC [

Select printer (Data Control 1)

Deselect printer (Data Control 3)

Delete

Enquiry

Escape

String Terminator

CSI

DC1

DC3

DEL

ENQ

ESC

ESC \ or ST

ESC c

Reset to Initial State (RIS)

Index

Next line

ESC D or IND

ESC E or NEL

ESC H or HTS

ESC J or VTS

ESC K or PLD

ESC L or PLU

ESC M or RI

ESC P data or DCS

ESC [ p1; pn }

ESC [ p1;....pn m

Horizontal Tab Setting

Vertical Tab Setting

Partial Line Down

Partial Line Up

Reverse Index

Enter Dot Graphics Mode (Device Control String)

Sets bar code parameters (GENBC)

Select Graphics Rendition (SGR), Character Pitch, Print Modes and

Color Ribbon color.

ESC [ p1; p2 SP B

ESC [ p1; p2 s

ESC[ p1; pn u

Graphic Size Modification (GSM)

Left/Right Margin Set (GENSLR)

Sets horizontal tab stops at specified positions

Multiple Horizontal Tab Set (GENHTS)

Tab Clear (TBC)

Sets vertical tab stops at specified positions

(Multiple Vertical Tab Set - GENVTS)

Form Definition (GENFD)

ESC [ p1; pn g

ESC [ p1; pn v

ESC [ p1; p2; p3 r

ESC [ p1; p2 <SP> G Sets the line/character spacing

ESC [ p1;...pn h

ESC [ p1; pn l

ESC [ p1 ’

ESC [ p1 a

ESC [ p1 d

ESC [ p1 j

ESC [ p1 k

ESC [ p1 q

ESC [ p1 t

ESC [ p1; p2 f

ESC [ p1 e

ETX

Set Mode (SM)

Reset mode (RM)

Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA)

Horizontal Position Relative (HPR)

Vertical Position Absolute (VPA)

Horizontal Position Backward (HPB)

Vertical Position Backward (VPB)

Select Graphics Mode/Density(GENGRM)

Special Print Mode (Oversize/Expanded/Bar code Mode - GENSPM)

Horizontal and Vertical Position Absolute (HVP)

Vertical Position Relative (VPR)

End of transmission

Form Feed

Horizontal tab

Line Feed

Ignored

NUL

OSC

Operating System Command, ESC ]

Shift In

Shift Out

Space

Vertical tab

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Commands not implemented in the 7265 ANSI Emulation

ESC ] p1;pn<ST>

User Defined Character Substitution (GENUDS)

ESC ] p1;p2;p3;data<ST>

Operating system command (Load Mode OSC)

ESC [ p1;p2 SP ~

ESC [ p1;pn {

ESC [ p1;p2;p3 SP |

ESC [ p1;pn p

ESC [ p1 x

ESC k

ESC Q or PU1

Selects emulation (GENEMU)

Unidirectional Printing (GENUPD)

Customer Setup Save/Unsave (GENCSX)

Assign Source for Forms (GENASF)

Selects National character set (Select National Characters - GENSNC)

Print Test Character (GENPTC)

Executes Self Test

Exceptions

1.) Barcode ratios are controlled by one parameter that affects both width and height.

2.) Block characters print at a fixed size.

3.) Block characters printed with a fixed rotation.

4.) The Genicom printer saves ESC sequence changes to powerup; we load from the powerup menu.

5.) <DEL> character prints a space; Genicom prints a “house” character.

6.) Across 13.6 inches we print one less character per line in the following CPI's:

6, 6.25, 6.67, 8.33, 8.57, 9, 12, 12.5, 13.3, 17.14 and 18

7.) If we set Auto CR to ON then form feeds also get a CR, where Genicom does not add CR to form feeds.

Genicom does add CR to FF if "Auto CR on Vertical Tab" is enabled.

8.) Different combinations of adding and removing vertical tabs will produce different results compared to the

Genicom printer.

9.) Differences when mixing some form lengths with top and bottom margins.

10.)Some illegal parameters are treated different than the Genicom printer.

11.)Default horizontal and vertical tabs are not defined at power up.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programmer's Reference

EPSON Emulation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Description of Escape Sequences

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Paper and Text Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Form Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page Length in Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Perforation Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Right Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Left Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Justification and Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Character Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HMI (Horizontal Motion Index) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enlarged print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Continuous enlarged print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Condensed Character Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Character Density 10 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Character Density 12 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Character Density 15 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Proportional Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Character Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fixed Line Spacing 1/8 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fixed Line Spacing 7/72 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fixed Line Spacing 1/6 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Variable Line Spacing n/180 or n/216 Inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Variable Line Spacing n/60 or n/72 Inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Variable Line Spacing n/360 Inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Super-/Subscript Mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Double Strike . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select Font and Pitch by Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Font Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Typeface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emphasized Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Underline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Score Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Italic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Double Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horizontal Tab Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Horizontal and Vertical Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horizontal and Vertical Step Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Absolute Horizontal Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Relative Horizontal Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vertical Tab Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set/Reset Vertical Tabs in Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select Vertical Tab Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Absolute Vertical Print Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Relative Vertical Print Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select Graphics Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphics 60 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphics 120 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphics 240 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphic Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphics Mode Reassignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphics Printing with 9 Print Dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Download Character Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Copy ROM into RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Raster Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Activate User Defined Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Draft Character Definition (9 Needle Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Definition of a Character (9 Needle Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attribute"A" (9 Needle Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Descenders (9 Needle Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Proportional Spacing Data (9 Needle Printer) . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculation of the Attribute (9 Needle Printer) . . . . . . . . . . .

Definition of NLQ Characters (9 Needle Printer) . . . . . . . . . . .

24 Needle Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Data as Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing Direction unidirectional for one line . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Half-Speed Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Single n/180 inch or n/216 inch line feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Single n/216 inch back feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Colour Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

International Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assign Character Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input Data Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sheet Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Code Area Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Activate/Deactivate Graphics Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Activate/Deactivate Direct Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

International Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Activate Paper End Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

101

103

105

107

108

110

112

113

114

115

Control Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A Summary of Possible Codes

Sorted by Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-2

A-7

Sorted by Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix B Character Sets

Standard Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

International Substitution Table - normal font . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

International Substitution Table - italic font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphics Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Character Set, extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphics Character Set, extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

International Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

International Character Set, extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Character Width for Proportional Printing . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-3

B-4

B-5

B-6

B-7

B-8

B-9

B-10

B-11

Index

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Description of Sequences

Introduction

Paper and Text Formatting

Character Spacing

Line Spacing

Character Styling

Print Positioning

Graphics

Download Character Generator

Miscellaneous

Control Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

This User’s Manual describes the sum of all EPSON Escape sequences, regardless of

the specific EPSON emulation used by your printer. The only differentiation is made be-

tween 9 and 24 needle printers as well as the maximum possible paper width of 8 inches

(80 column printer) or 13.6 inches (136 column printer). Please note that the print quality

LQ (Letter Quality) is only available in the 24 needle printer.

Please be sure to observe the notes and steps described in the Operator’s Manual as

well as the specific EPSON emulations implemented in your printer and which of the

described sequences are thus not available for that specific emulation.

Select the EPSON mode as described in the Operator’s Manual. Selecting this emulation

mode will automatically select the Epson character set.

Read the Operator’s Manual to see whether it is also possible to use ANSI (MTPL)

sequences in addition to the special Epson sequences.

The following explanations will help you understand the sequences better:

Every sequence description begins with a header, in which the function and the short

form of the sequence are listed without parameters, e.g.:

Setting the form length in lines

Setting the form length in inches

ESC C

ESC C NUL

The ESC control code (hex. 1B, dec. 27) introduces every Escape sequence. The charac-

ters following the ESC control code (here C) determine the sequence’s function.

2 Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This is followed by the Data Structure in ASCII, hexadecimal and decimal syntax with the

necessary parameters, e.g.:

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "C" <n>

1B 43 <n>

27 67 <n>

Setting the form length in lines

For the parameter (here n) it is necessary to differentiate between two types of syntax.

if the parameter is in pointed parentheses, the decimal value is transferred

if the parameter is not in pointed parentheses, the ASCII value is transferred

Example:

Parameter syntax:

to be transmitted:

<n>, with n=0

ASCII "NUL" (hex.00, dec.0)

Parameter syntax:

to be transmitted:

n, with n=0

ASCII "0" (hex.30, dec.48)

Character explanation and symbol description

Lower case "l"

Information

Sequence only applies for 9 needle printer

Sequence only applies for 24 needle printer

Sequence only applies for ESC/P2 printers

On the next page you will find examples for Escape sequences complete with BASIC pro-

gramming examples.

Introduction 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the form length to 72 lines

Escape Sequence

ESC

<n>

with n=72

Transfer

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC

"C"

"H"

100 REM Sample for the ESC C <n> sequence in ASCII,

110 REM using form with 72 lines.

120 REM Please note, in ASCII-Syntax you can use ASCII values

130 REM equal or bigger codetable no. 32 only.

140 REM LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";"H": REM mixed syntax;

150 REM set form length up to 72 lines

160 REM The same sequence written in hexadecimal syntax

170 LPRINT CHR$(&H1B);CHR$(&H43);CHR$(&H48);

180 REM set form length up to 12 lines

190 REM The same sequence written in decimal syntax

200 LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(67);CHR$(72);

210 REM set form length up to 72 lines

Setting the form length to 12 inches

Escape Sequence

Transfer

ESC

NUL

<n>

with n=12

ASCII

hex.

ESC

"C"

NUL

dec.

100 REM Sample for the ESC C NUL <n> sequence in ASCII,

110 REM using form with 12 inch length.

120 REM Please note, in ASCII-Syntax you can use ASCII values

130 REM equal or bigger codetable no. 32 only.

140 REM LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(0);CHR$(12): REM mixed syntax;

150 REM set form length up to 12 inch

160 REM The same sequence written in hexadecimal syntax

170 LPRINT CHR$(&H1B);CHR$(&H43);CHR$(&H0);CHR$(&HC);

180 REM set form length up to 12 inch

190 REM The same sequence written in decimal syntax

200 LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(67);CHR$(0);CHR$(12);

210 REM set form length up to 12 inch

4 Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper and Text Formatting

Form Length in Lines

Form Length in Inches

ESC C

ESC C NUL

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "C" <n>

1B 43 <n>

27 67 <n>

set form length in lines

set form length in inches

–˜

—˜

ASCII

hex.

ESC "C" <0> <n>

1B 43

<n>

dec.

27 67 00 <n>

Description

– This code sequence sets the form length to n times the current line feed pitch (in in-

ches). Also the current print position is simultaneously defined as top of form.

The value specified for n must be an integer in the range of 1 to 127. This value is mul-

tiplied by the current line feed pitch to obtain the form length. For example, if 60 is

specified for n and the current line feed pitch is ¹⁄₆inch, the form length is set to 10 in-

ches. Once set by this sequence, the form length is not affected by changing the line

spacing. This code sequence is ignored if the value specified for n is not in the range

of 1 to 127.

— This code sequence sets the form length to the number of inches specified by n. It

also defines the current print position as top of form.

The value specified for n must be an integer in the range of 1 to 22; otherwise the se-

quence will be ignored.

˜ This code sequence resets the perforation skip function (ESC N).

Paper and Text Formatting 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM form length

20 FF$=CHR$(12)

30 K=1

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(4);

50 FOR F=1 TO 3

60 FOR L=1 TO K

70 LPRINT "length 4: form";F;"line";L

80 NEXT L

90 K=K+1

100 LPRINT FF$;

110 NEXT F

120 K=1

130 LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(3);

140 FOR F=1 TO 3

150 FOR L=1 TO K

160 LPRINT "length 3: form";F;"line";L

170 NEXT L

180 K=K+1

190 LPRINT FF$;

200 NEXT F

210 END

6 Paper and Text Formatting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Page Length in Units

ESC ( C

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "("

"C" <n_L> <n_H> <m_L><m_H>

set page length in units

1B 28 43 <n_L> <n_H> <m_L><m_H>

27 40 67 <n_L> <n_H> <m_L><m_H>

Valid values:

n_L= 2, n_H= 0

0 < ((m_Hx 256) + m_L) x (defined unit) ≤ 22

Defines page length in untis previously defined with the sequence ESC ( U (see page 62).

(page length) = ((m_Hx 256) + m_L) x (defined unit)













(page length) x

(defined unit)

m_H= INT

256









(page length) x





(defined unit)

256

m_L= MOD

This sequence sets top and bottom margins to default.

Set page length first, then load paper. Using this sequence within the form sets top of

form position at the current position.

Paper and Text Formatting 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Page Format

ESC ( c

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "("

"c" <n_L> <n_H> <t_L> <t_H> <b_L> <b_H>

set page format

1B 28 63 <n_L> <n_H> <t_L> <t_H> <b_L> <b_H>

27 40 99 <n_L> <n_H> <t_L> <t_H> <b_L> <b_H>

Valid values:

n_L= 4, n_H= 0

((t_Hx 256) + t_L) < ((b_Hx 256) + b_L)

((b_Hx 256) + b_L) x (defined unit) ≤ 22

top margin < bottom margin

bottom margin < 22 inches

Defines top and bottom margins previously defined with the sequence ESC ( U

(see page 62).

(top margin) = ((t_Hx 256) + t_L) x (defined unit)













(top margin) x

(defined unit)

t_H= INT

256









(top margin) x





(defined unit)

256

t_L= MOD

(top margin) = ((t_Hx 256) + t_L) x (defined unit)













(bottom margin) x

(defined unit)

b_H= MOD

b_L= MOD

256









(bottom margin) x





(defined unit)

256

8 Paper and Text Formatting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This sequence sets new top and bottom. it does not affect the current page length setting.

Set top and bottom margin first, then load paper. Using this sequence within the form

sets top margin at the current position.

Paper and Text Formatting 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Perforation Skip

ESC N

ESC O

Reset Perforation Skip

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "N" <n>

1B 4E <n>

27 78 <n>

set space before perforation (perforation skip)

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "O"

1B 4F

27 79

reset perforation skip

Description

– This code sequence enables the perforation skip function and sets the bottom margin

(distance between the last print line of one page and the first print line of the following

page) to n lines. The value specified for n must be in the range of 1 to 127 and must

be smaller than the form length minus the top margin.

The printer automatically advances the paper to the first printable line of the next page

whenever the current print line falls within the margin area defined as n lines from the

bottom of the current page (n being the value specified for the bottom margin area).

The margin area before and after the perforation is n times the current line spacing.

Once this margin area has been defined, it will not be affected by changing the line

spacing and remains effective until the printer receives code sequence ESC O (reset

perforation skip), or until form length is changed by ESC C or ESC C 0.

— This code sequence deselects the perforation skip function set by ESC N <n>.The bot-

tom margin is set to 0 lines, thus disabling perforation skip. This results in continuous

printout, unless the software used in the computer defines the form length by counting

the printed lines.

This function only applies for fanfold paper, not for cut sheet processing or with mounted

sheet feeder.

10 Paper and Text Formatting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

skip

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(6);:REM form length

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"N";CHR$(1);:REM set skip

40 FOR F=1 TO 2

50 FOR L=1 TO 5

60 LPRINT "form";F;" line";L

70 NEXT L:NEXT F

80 END

Paper and Text Formatting 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Right Margin

Left Margin

ESC Q

^ESCl

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "Q" <n> set right margin

1B 51 <n>

27 81 <n>

–

—

ASCII

hex.

^{ESC "}l ^"<n> set left margin

1B 6C <n>

dec.

27 108 <n>

Description

Values for n

Character

density

80 columns

printer

136 columns

printer

10 cpi

12 cpi

15 cpi

17.1 cpi

20 cpi

1... 80

1... 96

1...120

1...136

1...160

1...136

1...163

1...204

1...232

1...255

Values for n are valid for a line length of 8 inch (80 columns printer) or 13.6 inch

(136 columns printer) set in the menu.

The absolute margin position depends on whether enlarged print mode, compressed print

mode, Pica or Elite are selected. When using proportional spacing, the setting of the mar-

gins corresponds to the setting when in Pica font type (10 cpi).

The command for setting the margins must be given at the beginning of a line, all data of

the same line are lost in the print buffer.

– The right margin is set to n columns, depending on the character density selected. As

soon as the right margin is reached after this command has been given, a carriage re-

turn and a line feed are added to the characters to be printed.

— The left margin is set to n columns, depending on the character density selected.

12 Paper and Text Formatting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

20 LPRINT "

left and right margin

30 LPRINT "12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123"

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"l";CHR$(10);CHR$(27);"Q";CHR$(53);

50 LPRINT "Now the left margin is set to column 10 and";

60 LPRINT "the right margin is set to column 53."

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"l";CHR$(5);CHR$(27);"Q";CHR$(41);

80 LPRINT "Now the left margin has been reduced";

90 LPRINT "to column 5 and the right margin has";

100 LPRINT "been set to column 41."

110 END

Paper and Text Formatting 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Justification and Centering

ESC a

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "a" <n>

1B 61 <n> or n

27 97 <n> or n

In some cases it is necessary to center headlines or to have the text printed in a way that

left or right margin or both margins are justified. By means of this code sequence the prin-

ter automatically justifies the text.

Justification mode depends on the value selected for n:

0 (hex.00 or hex.30)

1 (hex.01 or hex.31)

2 (hex.02 or hex.32)

3 (hex.03 or hex.33)

left justification (default setting)

centered

right justification

left and right justification

–

The justification mode must always be set at beginning of the line.

Justification mode can be used in all print qualities.

– If left and right justification is activated, the validity of codes ESC $, ESC\ and HT at

the beginning of the line is checked.

Left and right justification is only achieved if the length of the data line (measured from

the start of data input up to a CR or LF code) fills 75% to 125% of the given printed

area.

At less than 75%, left and right justification justification is not achieved. If the length of

the printed line extends more than 25% outside of the printed area, left and right justifi-

cation justification is carried out for the character spacing which comes closest to the

value of 100% within the printed area. The remaining data are printed in the next line.

14 Paper and Text Formatting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

justification and centering

20 WIDTH "LPT1:",255

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"Q";CHR$(48);:REM set right margin

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"a";CHR$(1);"CENTERED"

50 LPRINT "HEADLINE"

55 LPRINT CHR$(27);"a";CHR$(3)

60 LPRINT "Now the right and the left justification ";

70 LPRINT "is on. The lines are filled with blanks ";

80 LPRINT "until they are long enough to reach the ";

90 LPRINT "right margin."

100 LPRINT

110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"a";CHR$(2);"These lines are only"

120 LPRINT "justificated on the"

130 LPRINT "right margin."

140 LPRINT

150 LPRINT CHR$(27);"a";CHR$(0);"Now the default setting"

160 LPRINT "is selected again. The lines are"

170 LPRINT "justified on the left margin."

180 END

Paper and Text Formatting 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Spacing

Set HMI (Horizontal Motion Index)

ESC c

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "c" <n_L> <n_H>

1B 63 <n_L> <n_H>

27 99 <n_L> <n_H>

set HMI (Horizontal Motion Index)

Valid values:

0 ≤ n_H≤ 4

0 ≤ n_L≤ 255

0 < ((n_Hx 256) + n_L)) ≤ 1080; HMI ≤ 3.00 inches

The normal print density is enlarged according this formula:

(n_Hx 256) + n_L

HMI =

inch

360

HMI x 360

256

n_H= INT

HMI x 360

n_L= MOD

256

16 Character Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This sequence terminates previously set additional character space defined with

ESC SP.

Following sequences will cancel the HMI mode:

ESC !

ESC @

DC2

print mode selection

printer initialization

reset condensed print

DC4

reset enlarged print mode (set by <SO> or ESC <SO>)

character density 15 cpi

character density 12 cpi (Elite)

character density 10 cpi (Pica)

proportional spacing ON/OFF

character spacing

ESC g

ESC M

ESC P

ESC p

ESC SP

ESC W

continuous enlarged print mode ON/OFF

condensed print ON

enlarged print mode (automatically reset after one line)

Character Spacing 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set enlarged Print Mode

SO/ESC SO

DC4

ESC W

Reset enlarged Print Mode

Continuous enlarged Print Mode

Syntax

ASCII

hex.

dec.

or ESC SO

or 1B 0E

or 27 14

set enlarged print mode (for one line)

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4

reset enlarged print mode

(set by SO or ESC SO)

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "W" <n> or n

1B 57 <n> or n

27 88 <n> or n

set/reset continuous enlarged print mode

Description

– Either one of these codes switches the printer to the enlarged print mode. In enlarged

print mode, the width of printed characters are twice that in the normal mode. Enlar-

ged printing can be used with all print qualities.

Enlarged print mode set by SO or ESC SO is reset by LF, CR, FF, VT, ESC !,

ESC W <0> and DC4.

— This code resets the printer from enlarged print mode to normal (standard size)

mode.The code is ignored except when the printer has been set to enlarged mode by

SO or ESC SO. It does not affect the enlarged mode set by ESC W or by ESC ! se-

quences.

˜ This code sequence switches the printer to continuous enlarged print mode when 1 is

specified for n, and resets printing to normal mode when 0 is specified.

Enlarged print activated by the code sequence SO or ESC SO is also reset to normal

mode when n=0. Valid values for n are hex.00, hex.01, hex.30 and hex.31.

18 Character Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM enlarged character densities

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"P";: REM 10 cpi

30 LPRINT "normal 10 cpi character density"

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"W";CHR$(1);: REM continuous enlarged density

50 LPRINT "10 cpi continuous enlarged"

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"M";: REM 12 cpi

70 LPRINT "12 cpi continuous enlarged"

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"W0";: REM normal character density

90 LPRINT CHR$(14);: REM enlarged character density for one line

100 LPRINT "this is enlarged only"

110 LPRINT "for one line"

120 END

Character Spacing 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Condensed Character Density

SI/ESC SI

DC2

Reset Condensed Character Density

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

or ESC SI

or 1B 0F

or 27 15

condensed print ON

reset condensed print

–

—

ASCII

hex.

DC2

dec.

Description

– When the printer receives this code, the data will be printed approx. 40% smaller than

in normal mode. Condensed print mode can be used in all print qualities. It can be

used during printing in the double strike or bold modes. Once set, this code remains ef-

fective until it is reset by code DC2.

— When the printer receives this code, the condensed print mode is reset.

This code is ignored except when the printer has been set to condensed mode by SI

or ESC SI.

Proportionally spaced characters cannot be condensed.

Example

10 REM condensed character densities

20 LPRINT CHR$ (15);"this is condensed density";

30 LPRINT CHR$(18);" and this is normal density"

40 END

20 Character Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Density 10 cpi

Character Density 12 cpi

Character Density 15 cpi

ESC P

ESC M

ESC g

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "P"

1B 50

27 80

set character density to 10 cpi (Pica)

set character density to 12 cpi (Elite)

set character density to 15 cpi

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "M"

1B 4D

27 77

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "g"

1B 67

27 103

Description

– This code sequence sets the character density to 10 cpi (Pica). This is also the default

character density.

— This code sequence sets the character density to 12 cpi (Elite).

˜ This code sequence sets the character density to 15 cpi. With this code sequence not

only the character spacing is altered, but also the size of the characters (approx. 2.3

mm high and 1 mm wide). That is why the font set with this sequence is referred to as

microfont.

All three control codes neutralise each other.

If the character spacing is changed using one of the sequences – with proportional

spacing selected this change only becomes effective when the printer leaves the

proportional mode.

Character Spacing 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

single character densities

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"P";"this is pica sized"

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"M";"and this is elite sized"

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"g";"and this is 15 cpi"

50 END

22 Character Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Proportional Spacing

ESC p

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "p" <n> or n

1B 70 <n> or n

27 112 <n> or n

proportional spacing ON/OFF

If 1 is specified for n, proportional spacing is ON, if 0 is specified for n, proportional

spacing is OFF.

When in default font type, all characters are assigned a fixed, equally wide space. When

in proportional spacing, the spaces between each character are set to the actual width of

the characters; on account of these “proportional” characters reading of the text becomes

more easy.

Proportional spacing selects automatically LQ as print quality. Condensed is reset. The

set character densities are only effective again, when proportional spacing is switched off.

Example

10 REM

proportional spacing

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"p";CHR$(1);

30 LPRINT "This is proportional spacing"

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"p";CHR$(0);

50 LPRINT "This is normal spacing"

60 END

Character Spacing 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Spacing

ESC SP

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC SP <n>

1B 20 <n>

27 32 <n>

The size of the spaces between the characters is increased by n ∗ ¹⁄₁₈₀inch in NLQ and

LQ and in Draft by n ∗ ¹⁄₁₂₀inch. This space is added to the spaces used for character de-

finition.

The value specified for n must be in the range of 0 to 127.

Example

10 REM

character spacing

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"@"

25 LPRINT CHR$(27);"x1";:REM High Print quality

30 LPRINT "this is normal width"

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);" ";CHR$(3);

50 LPRINT "now 3/180 inch is added to normal width"

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);" ";CHR$(6);

70 LPRINT "now 6/180 inch is added"

80 END

24 Character Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Spacing

Fixed Line Spacing 1/8 Inch

Fixed Line Spacing 7/72 Inch

Fixed Line Spacing 1/6 Inch

ESC 0

ESC 1

ESC 2

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "0"

1B 30

27 48

set line spacing to 1/8 inch

set line spacing to 7/72 inch

set line spacing to 1/6 inch

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "1"

1B 31

27 50

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "2"

1B 32

27 50

Description

– This code sequence sets line spacing to ⁄₈inch.

Once the line spacing has been changed by this sequence, ⁄₈inch line feeds are

made until line spacing is changed by code sequences ESC 1, ESC 2, ESC 3 n, ESC

A n or ESC + n.

— This code sequence sets line spacing to ⁄₇₂inch.

Once the line spacing has been changed by this sequence, ⁄₇₂inch line feeds are

made until line spacing is changed by code sequences ESC 0, ESC 2, ESC 3 n, ESC

A n or ESC + n.

˜ This code sequence sets line spacing to ⁄₆inch.

Once the line spacing has been changed by this sequence, ⁄₆inch line feeds are

made until line spacing is changed by code sequences ESC 0, ESC 1, ESC 3 n, ESC

A n or ESC + n.

Line Spacing 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note that changing the line spacing also changes the number of lines per page. Changing

the line spacing does not affect the current tab stops or form length.

Example

10 REM

fix line spacing

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"0"

30 LPRINT "these two lines are printed with"

40 LPRINT "a spacing of 1/8 inch"

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"2"

60 LPRINT "and these two lines are printed with"

70 LPRINT "a spacing of 1/6 inch"

80 END

26 Line Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Variable Line Spacing n/180 Inch or n/216 Inch

Variable Line Spacing n/60 Inch or n/72 Inch

Variable Line Spacing n/360 Inch

ESC 3

ESC A

ESC +

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "3" <n>

1B 33 <n>

27 51 <n>

set n/180 inch line spacing

set n/216 inch line spacing

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "A" <n>

1B 41 <n>

27 65 <n>

set n/60 inch line spacing

set n/72 inch line spacing

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "+" <n>

1B 2B <n>

27 43 <n>

set n/360 inch line spacing

Description

– When the printer receives this code sequence it sets the line feed pitch to ⁄₁₈₀inches

(24 needle version) or to ⁄₂₁₆inches (9 needle version). The value specified for n

must be in the range of 0 to 255.

— This code sequence sets the line feed pitch to ⁄₆₀inch (24 needle version) or to ⁄₇₂in-

ches (9 needle version). The value specified for n must be in the range of 1 to 127.

˜ This code sequence sets the line feed pitch to ⁄₃₆₀inch (24 needle version). The

9 needle printer ignores this sequence.

The value specified for n must be in the range of 1 to 127.

Once line spacing has been set with one of these sequences, an appropriate line feed is

made whenever code LF is received until line spacing is changed with one of the code

sequences ESC 0, ESC 1, ESC 2, ESC 3 n, ESC + n or ESC A n.

Line Spacing 27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

variable line spacing

20 FOR N= 20 TO 40 STEP 10

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"3";CHR$(N)

40 LPRINT "these two lines are printed with"

50 LPRINT "a spacing of";N;"/180 inches"

60 NEXT

70 END

10 REM

variable line spacing

20 FOR N= 20 TO 40 STEP 10

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"3";CHR$(N)

40 LPRINT "these two lines are printed with"

50 LPRINT "a spacing of";N;"/216 inches"

60 NEXT

70 END

28 Line Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Styling

Super-/Subscript Mode ON

Super-/Subscript Mode OFF

ESC S

ESC T

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "S" <n> or n

1B 53 <n> or n

27 83 <n> or n

super/subscript mode ON

super/subscript mode OFF

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "T"

1B 54

27 84

Description

– This code sequence switches the printer to superscript or subscript mode.

The printer is switched to superscript mode when 0 (hex.00 or hex.30) is set for n, and

to subscript mode when 1 (hex.01 or hex.31) is set. The subsequent characters are

printed with about ⁄₃of their normal height, either in the upper or lower half of the cor-

responding character location.

If superscript or subscript characters are underlined, the underline character is printed

at its normal position.

The characters hex.B0 to hex.DF (dec. 176...dec.223) and hex.F0 to hex.FE

(dec.240...dec.254) of the extended EPSON graphics character set cannot be set to

superscript or subscript mode.

— This code sequence resets the superscript or subscript mode to normal mode.

Character Styling 29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

superscript and subscript

20 LPRINT "E=M*C";

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"S";CHR$(0);

40 LPRINT "2";

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"T";

60 LPRINT " is Einsteins most famous formula."

70 LPRINT "H";

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"S";CHR$(1);"2";CHR$(27);"T";

90 LPRINT "O is simply water."

100 END

30 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Double Strike ON

Double Strike OFF

ESC G

ESC H

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "G"

1B 47

27 71

double strike ON

double strike OFF

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "H"

1B 48

27 72

Description

– This code sequence switches the printer to double strike mode. In double strike mode

characters are printed in two printing passes at the same horizontal position; thus print

appears thicker and fuller. Print speed is reduced since the characters are printed

twice.

Double strike mode can be used in combination with emphasized mode (ESC E).

Double strike mode is reset when the printer receives the code sequence ESC H.

— This code sequence resets the double strike mode set by ESC G or ESC !.

This code sequence is ignored when the printer is not in double strike mode.

Example

10 REM

double strike

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"H";

30 LPRINT "this is normal printing ";

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"G";

50 LPRINT "and this is double strike printing"

60 END

Character Styling 31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select Font and Pitch by Point

ESC X

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "X" <m> <n_L> <n_H>

1B 58 <m> <n_L> <n_H>

27 88 <m> <n_L> <n_H>

select font and pitch by point

Valid values:

5 ≤ m ≤ 127

0 ≤ n_L≤ 255

0 ≤ n_H≤ 127

m = 0.1

Selects the pitch and point attributes for scalable fonts.

Pitch:

m = 0

m = 1

m ≥ 5

m = 36

No change in pitch

Selects proportional spacing

Selects fixed pitch equal to 360/m cpi

default (10 cpi)

Points:

(point size) =

(n_Hx 256) + n_L

∧

inch

1 point

⁄₇₂inch

(point size) x 2

n_H= INT

256

(point size) x 2

n_L= MOD

256

n_H= n_L= 0

n_H= 0

n_L= 21

No change in point size

default (10.5 points)

}

32 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Not all printer fonts are scaleable. Please refer to the printer’s reference manual which

fonts are supported. Scaleable fonts can only be printed in one quality (LQ).

STOP

Points:

Following point sizes (1/72 inch) are available:

8, 10 (10.5), 12, 14, 16, 18, 20 (21), 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32

Pitch:

Previously set pitch settings will be cancelled.

Following sequences are ignored in scaleable font mode:

ESC SI

ESC SO

ESC SP

ESC W

ESC w

condensed print

enlarged print mode (automatically reset after one line)

character spacing

continuous enlarged print mode ON/OFF

double height

condensed print ON

enlarged print mode (automatically reset after one line)

Following sequences will cancel the scaleable font mode:

ESC !

print mode selection

ESC @

ESC g

ESC M

ESC P

ESC p

printer initialization

character density 15 cpi

character density 12 cpi (Elite)

character density 10 cpi (Pica)

proportional spacing ON/OFF

Character Styling 33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Quality

ESC x

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "x" <n> or n

1B 78 <n> or n

27 120 <n> or n

set print quality (PQ)

Description

Selected via control panel

NLQ

DPQ

NLQ

Valid values for n are either ASCII Code 0 and 1 (hex00 and hex.01) or ASCII characters

"0" and "1" (hex.30 and hex.31).

Example

10 REM print quality

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"x1";"This is high print quality "

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"x0";"and this is draft print quality."

40 END

34 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Font Type Selection

ESC k

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "k" <n>

1B 6B <n>

27 107 <n>

Corresponding to the value specified for n, one of the printer’s internal fonts or a font of

an optional font card is selected. Please refer to the printer’s reference manual which

fonts are supported by your printer type.

This sequence is not valid in Draft Mode.

Example (depending on the printer)

Roman

S_Serif

Courier

Prestige

Script

OCR-B

OCR-A

Modern

Kaufmann

Gothic

Quadrato

Kyrillic

Arabic_I

Arabic_II

Farsi_I

Farsi_II

Roman_T

S_Serif_H

Courier_I

Helvetica

These fonts can be selected also via the menu of the printer.

Roman_T and S_Serif_H are scaleable fonts.

Character Styling 35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM font selection

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"x1"; : REM high print quality

30 FOR i=0 TO 9

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"k";CHR$(i);

50 LPRINT "This is the font selected with ";i"

60 NEXT i

70 END

36 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Typestyle Selection

ESC q

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "q" <n> or n

1B 71 <n> or n

27 113 <n> or n

This sequence selects normal typestyle, outline typestyle, shaded typestyle or shaded out-

line typestyle. All the characters of the extended EPSON character set with the exception

of the characters hex.B0 to hex.DF (dec.176...dec.233), hex.F4 (dec.244) and hex.F5

(dec.245) can be printed in the selected typestyle.

The following parameter assignment applies:

Typestyle

0 (hex.00 or hex.30)

1 (hex.01 or hex.31)

2 (hex.02 or hex.32)

3 (hex.03 or hex.33)

Normal typestyle

Outline typestyle

Shaded typestyle

Shaded Outline typestyle

Beispiel

10 REM character style

20 LF$=CHR$(10)

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"q";CHR$(0);

40 LPRINT "<0> normal characters";LF$

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"q";CHR$(1);

60 LPRINT "<1> outline characters";LF$

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"q";CHR$(2);

80 LPRINT "<2> shadow characters";LF$

90 LPRINT CHR$(27);"q";CHR$(3);

100 LPRINT "<3> outline shadow characters";LF$

110 END

Character Styling 37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Emphasized Mode ON

Emphasized Mode OFF

ESC E

ESC F

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "E"

1B 45

27 69

emphasized mode ON

emphasized mode OFF

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "F"

1B 46

27 70

Description

– This code sequence switches the printer to emphasized mode. During printing in

emphasized mode, each character is printed twice, slightly shifted in horizontal

direction. Since the needles in the print head are fired twice (instead of once as in

standard mode), print speed is reduced.

This code sequence is ignored if received while the printer is already in emphasized

mode.

Emphasized mode plus condensed or Elite is not possible.

— This code sequence resets the emphasized mode initiated by ESC E or ESC ! (Master

Select).

This code sequence is ignored if the printer is not in emphasized mode.

Example

10 REM

emphasized mode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"F";"this is printed in the normal mode

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"E";"and this is in the emphasized on"

40 END

38 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Underline Mode

ESC -

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "-"

1B 2D <n> or n

27 45 <n> or n

<n> or n

underline mode ON/OFF

This code sequence switches the automatic underline function ON or OFF. When the

automatic underline function is ON, all printed characters including spaces are automat-

ically underlined.

The automatic underline function is ON when 1 is specified for n, and is OFF when 0 is

specified. Once the printer receives ESC -<1>, all subsequent characters including

spaces are automatically underlined until ESC -<0> is received.

Spaces between tab codes (HT) will not be underlined.

The characters hex.B0 to hex.DF (hex.176...dec.223) and hex.F0 to hex.FE

(dec.240...dec.254) of the extended EPSON graphics character set cannot be underlined

using this mode.

Example

10 REM

underline mode

20 LPRINT "the most ";

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"-";CHR$(1);

40 LPRINT "important";

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"-";CHR$(0);

60 LPRINT " word must be underlined."

70 END

Character Styling 39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Score Selection

ESC ( -

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "("

1B 28 2D 03 00 01 <n₁> <n₂>

27 40 45 <n₁> <n₂>

"-"

<3> NUL <1> <n₁> <n₂>

This Escape sequence switches on and off the underscore, overscore and strike-through

modes. The lines can be single or double, broken or continuous.

n₁= loc

n₂= type

loc (n₁)

The parameter n₁indicates the location of the score to be printed.

The following values are avaiable:

(hex.01) = underscore mode

(hex.02) = strike-through mode

(hex.03) = overscore mode

type (n₂)

The parameter n₂indicates the type of score to be printed.

The following values are avaiable:

(hex.00) = cancel scoring selected by n₁(loc)

(hex.01) = single continuous line

(hex.02) = double continuous line

(hex.05) = single broken line

(hex.06) = double broken line

This command can be used more than once to activate the underscore, strike-through

and overscore modes at the same time with different line types.

This mode cannot be used to underscore, strike-through or overscore block graphic char-

acters.

40 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM Score Selection

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(-";CHR$(3);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);CHR$(1);CHR$(2);

30 LPRINT "1. Underline - Double continous line"

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(-";CHR$(3);CHR$(0); CHR$(1);CHR$(2);CHR$(2);

50 LPRINT "2. Strike through and Underline - Double continous line"

60 REM cancel strike through - double continous line

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(-";CHR$(3);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);CHR$(2);CHR$(0);

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(-";CHR$(3);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);CHR$(2);CHR$(1);

90 LPRINT "3. Strike through - Single continous line and"

100 LPRINT " Underline - Double continous line"

110 REM cancel underline - double continous line

120 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(-";CHR$(3);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);CHR$(1);CHR$(0);

130 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(-";CHR$(3);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);CHR$(3);CHR$(1);

140 LPRINT "4. Overscore and strike through - Single continous line"

150 END

Character Styling 41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Italic Mode ON

Italic Mode OFF

ESC 4

ESC 5

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "4"

1B 34

27 52

italic mode ON

italic mode OFF

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "5"

1B 35

27 53

Description

– All characters following this code sequence are printed in italics. Italic characters are

also printed, if codes with the eight bit set by ESC > are sent to the printer.

The characters hex.B0 to hex.DF (hex.176...dec.223) and hex.F0 to hex.FE

(dec.240...dec.254) of the extended EPSON graphics character set cannot be printed

in italic mode.

— Italic print mode set by ESC 4 or ESC ! (Master Select) is reset. Italic mode can be

used in all print qualities (DPQ, NLQ, LQ).

Example

10 REM

italic mode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"4";

30 GOSUB 70

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"5";

50 GOSUB 70

60 END

70 LPRINT "Matrix Printer"

80 RETURN

42 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Mode Selection

ESC !

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "!"

1B 21 <n>

27 33 <n>

<n>

This code sequence allows simultaneous control of print features like the character size

and attributes characters. By this code sequence several print features can be simulta-

neously set via the value of n. This command can also be used to reset all character sty-

ling features or to reset the printer to standard Pica font type by specifying n=0.

The value specified for n must be in the range of 0 to 255. See the following table for pos-

sible values of n.

Print mode selection byte:

0 = Pica (10 cpi)

1 = Elite (12 cpi)

Proportional

Condensed

Bold

Double Strike

Enlarged

Italic

Underline Mode

Character Styling 43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stan-

dard

Con-

densed larged enlarg. tional

En-

Cond. Propor- Prop.-/ LQ

enlarg.

enlarged

Pica

- normal

–

- emphas.

- double

- em./double

–

Pica italic

- normal

–

100

–

114

–

- emphas.

- double

- em./double

104

112

120

–

116

–

Pica

underlined

- normal

128

136

144

152

132

–

160

168

176

184

164

–

130

146

–

162

178

–

128

136

–

160

168

–

- emphas.

- double

- em./double

148

–

180

–

Pica italic

underlined

- normal

192

200

208

216

196

–

224

232

240

248

228

–

194

210

–

226

242

–

- emphas.

- double

- em./double

212

–

244

–

Elite

- normal

- double

–

Elite italic

- normal

- double

113

101

117

–

Elite

underlined

- normal

- double

129

145

133

149

161

177

165

181

–

Elite italic

underlined

- normal

- double

193

209

197

213

225

241

229

245

–

44 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

print mode selection

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"D";CHR$(40);CHR$(0);

30 FOR N = 0 TO 255 STEP 7

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"!";CHR$(N);

50 LPRINT "Matrix Printer";CHR$(9);CHR$(27);"!";CHR$(0);N

60 NEXT N

70 END

Character Styling 45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Double Height

ESC w

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "w" <n>

1B 77 <n> or n

27 119 <n> or n

double height ON/OFF

By means of this code sequence the characters of the subsequent text are specified with

double height.

ESC w followed by n=1 (hex.01 or hex.31) sets double height printing. To reset the

double height to the normal height, specify n=0 (hex.00 oder hex.30).

The line spacing is not altered. This command cannot be combined with superscript/sub-

script or condensed print commands.

ESC w with parameter n=0 (hex.00 or hex.30) resets character representation back to

normal character height.

Example

10 REM

double height

20 LPRINT "for ";

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"w";CHR$(1);

30 LPRINT "Headlines ";

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"w";CHR$(0);

50 LPRINT "double height printing is recommended"

46 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Positioning

Horizontal Tab Stops

ESC D

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "D" <n₁> ...<n₃₂> NUL

1B 44 <n₁> ...<n₃₂> 00

set horizontal tab stops

–

—

27 68 <n₁> ...<n₃₂>

ASCII

hex.

ESC "D" NUL

1B 44 00

clear all horizontal tab stops

dec.

27 68

Description

– This code sequence is used for setting or clearing horizontal tab stops. It replaces all

previous tab stops and can be used to set a maximum of 32 tab stops.

For example,

CHR$(27);"D";CHR$(1);CHR$(11);CHR$(21);CHR$(0);

sets horizontal tab stops at positions 1, 11, and 21, position 1 being the position of the

first character at the left margin.

Double width printing does not influence the physical positions of tab stops.

Tab stops are set in those positions which are specified by character codes following

ESC D. These character codes must be arranged in ascending order.

The length of this code sequence varies according to the number of tab stops being

set. Code hex.00 is used as a terminator to signal the end of the data string.

If a character code with a smaller numeric value than the preceding is among those

codes, the code with the smaller value is ignored. Horizontal tab stops can be set at

positions 1 to 255 (136 columns printer) resp. 1 to 160 (80 columns printer). Horizontal

tab stops set by this sequence remain effective until the printer again receives code se-

quence ESC D or until it is initialized by code sequence ESC @.

For proportional spacing, tab stops are set in pica spacing (10 cpi).

A horizontal tabulation is executed by HT control code (hex.09, dec.9).

— This code sequence cancels all previous tab stops.

Print Positioning 47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When the printer is switched on or ESC @ is sent, horizontal tab stops are set at every

eight position (9, 17, 25, etc.).

Example

10 REM

horizontal tabs

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"D";CHR$(0) :REM clear old tabs

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"D";CHR$(10);CHR$(20);CHR$(30);CHR$(0);

40 LPRINT CHR$(18);:REM 10 cpi

50 LPRINT "123456789012345678901234567890123456789"

60 GOSUB 120

70 LPRINT CHR$(14);:REM double width

80 GOSUB 120

90 LPRINT CHR$(15);:REM condensed

100 GOSUB 120

110 END

120 LPRINT CHR$(9);"tab1";

130 LPRINT CHR$(9);"tab2";

140 LPRINT CHR$(9);"tab3"

150 RETURN

48 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Horizontal and Vertical Step Width

ESC e

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "e" NUL <n>

1B 65 00 <n>

Set horizontal step width

Set vertical step width

–

27 101 0

<n>

ASCII

hex.

ESC "e" SOH <n>

1B 65 01 <n>

—

dec.

27 101 1

<n>

Description

– This sequence sets the horizontal step width n according to the current character den-

sity. When an HT command is received, a horizontal tab stop is carried out.

The following maximum values apply for n:

21 (Pica)

25 (Elite)

36 (narrow Pica)

42 (narrow Elite)

The horizontal tab stop positions are set relative to the left margin.

— This sequence defines the vertical step width n as the number of line feeds correspon-

ding to the line spacing set for LF. On receipt of a VT command, a vertical tab stop is

carried out.

The following maximum values apply for n:

n ≤ 127

n ≤ 255

Print Positioning 49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal and Vertical Step Forward

ESC f

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "f"

1B 66 00 <n>

27 102 0 <n>

NUL <n>

Set horizontal step forward –

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "f"

1B 66 01 <n>

27 102 1 <n>

SOH <n>

Set vertical step forward

—

Description

– At the next print position n spaces without carriage return (CR) are inserted. As soon

as this command is received, all data in the buffer are printed. This command is igno-

red when justification is activated. If the next print position is on or beyond the right

margin, a line feed is carried out and printing starts at the left margin.

— On receipt of this sequence the printer carries out n line feeds corresponding to the

current line spacing. A carriage return (CR) is not carried out. As soon as this com-

mand is received, all data in the buffer are printed.

50 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Absolute Horizontal Step

ESC $

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "$" <n₁> <n₂>

1B 24 <n₁> <n₂>

27 36 <n₁> <n₂>

set absolute horizontal step

This code sequence moves the print head to an absolute print position independent of the

current character density. The positioning is in increments of ⁄ inches. The print positi-

on from the left hand margin is then calculated as: (n₁+ n₂∗ 256).

The value specified for n₁must be in the range of 0 to 255, the value specified for n₂

must be in the range of 0 to 3.

This code sequence can be used in all print qualities (DPQ, NLQ, LQ).

Example for calculating n₁and n₂:

The print position is 4.5 inches, which corresponds to a number of dots of 270

(4.5 inch x 60 dots/inch = 270 dots).

n₂

number of dots divided by 256

270

⁄

256

dec.1

hex.01

n₁

remainder of division of n₂

dec.14

hex.0E

Note that you obtain the same result by using the formula given for calculating n₁and n₂

for relative horizontal step (see sequence ESC \). Only the way to get it is different. The

reason for these different descriptions is that customers’ programming experience is not

the same. Therefore this is meant to be a little help for you to choose the easiest way.

Print Positioning 51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM absolute horizontal position

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"x1";:REM select LQ

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"$";CHR$(10);CHR$(0);"10";

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"$";CHR$(100);CHR$(0);"100";

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"$";CHR$(170);CHR$(0);"170";

60 LPRINT

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"W1";

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"$";CHR$(10);CHR$(0);"10";

90 LPRINT CHR$(27);"$";CHR$(100);CHR$(0);"100";

100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"$";CHR$(170);CHR$(0);"170";

110 LPRINT

120 END

52 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Relative Horizontal Step

ESC \

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "\"

1B 5C <n₁> <n₂>

27 92 <n₁> <n₂>

<n₁> <n₂>

set relative horizontal step

This code sequence moves the print head to a relative print position without regard to the

current character density. This print position is calculated according to the formula

(n₁+ 256 ∗ n₂).Each dot, i. e. each print position has a width of

⁄

inch in DPQ and

120

⁄₁₈₀inch in NLQ and LQ.

Calculation of the values of n₁and n₂first requires the prefix (n dots) to be calculated. If

the movement is directed towards the left side, the result is subtracted from 65536. Sub-

sequently the values for n₁and n₂can be calculated according to the formula:

n₁

n₂

= n MOD 256

= INT( ⁄₂₅₆

)

If the print position exceeds the currently set margins after execution of the horizontal

step, this code sequence is ignored.

This code sequence can be used in all print qualities (DPQ, NLQ, LQ).

Example for calculating n₁and n₂:

Movement of 4 inches towards the right side:

4 _*120

480

n₂

INT (

⁄

)

256

dec.1

hex.01

Print Positioning 53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

n₁

480 MOD 256

dec.224

hex.E0

Movement of ⁄₃inches (1.67 inches) towards the left side:

65536 - 1.67 _*120

65336

n₂

INT (⁶⁵³³⁶

dec.255

hex.FF

⁄

)

256

n₁

65336 MOD 256

dec.56

hex.38

Note that you obtain the same result by using the formula given for calculating n₁and n₂

for absolute horizontal step (see sequence ESC $). Only the method of calculations is

different. The two different methods give the same result and therefore the programmer

should use the method best suited for his application.

Example

10 REM

relative horizontal position

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"\";CHR$(224);CHR$(1);"+480";

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"\";CHR$(56);CHR$(255);"-200";

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"\";CHR$(50);CHR$(0);"+50";

50 LPRINT

60 END

54 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Tab Stops

ESC B

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

ESC "B" <n₁>...<n₁₆> NUL

1B 42 <n₁>...<n₁₆> 00

set vertical tab stops

–

dec.

27 66 <n₁>...<n₁₆>

ASCII

hex.

ESC "B" NUL

1B 42 00

reset all vertical tab stops

—

dec.

27 66

Description

– By means of this code sequence a maximum of 16 vertical tab stops can be set.

For example,

CHR$(27);"B";CHR$(1);CHR$(11);CHR$(21);CHR$(0);

sets vertical tab stops at lines 1, 11 and 21, line 1 being the first line of the page.

Tab stops are set in those positions which are specified by character codes following

ESC B. These character codes must be arranged in ascending order.

The length of this code sequence varies according to the number of tab stops being

set. Code <NUL> (hex. 00) is used as a terminator to signal the end of the data string.

If any character code with a smaller numeric value than the preceding is among those

codes, the code with the smaller value is ignored. Vertical tab stops set by this

sequence remain effective until code sequence ESC B is received again or form

length is changed by ESC C.

A vertical tabulation is executed by the VT control code (hex.0B, dec.11).

— This code sequence cancels all previous tab stops.

For example,

CHR$(27);"B";CHR$(0)

clears all vertical tab stops.

Print Positioning 55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When the printer is switched on no vertical tab stops are set.

Example

10 REM

vertical tabs

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(10);:REM set form length

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"B";CHR$(0);:REM clear all vtabs

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"B";CHR$(3);CHR$(5);CHR$(9);CHR$(0);

50 LPRINT CHR$(11);"this is the first vertical tab, line 3"

60 LPRINT CHR$(11);"this is the second vertical tab, line 5"

70 LPRINT CHR$(11);"this is the third vertical tab, line 9"

80 END

56 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set/Reset Vertical Tabs in Channels

Select Vertical Tab Channel

ESC b

ESC /

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "b" <m> <n₁>...<n₁₆> NUL

1B 62 <m> <n1>...<n16> 00

27 98 <m> <n1>...<n16> 0

set vertical tabs in channels

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "b" <m> NUL

1B 62 <m> 00

27 98 <m> 0

clear all tab settings

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "/"

<m>

select vertical tab channel

1B 2F <m>

27 47 <m>

Description

– Up to 16 vertical tabs for one channel <m> can be set. the number of tab channels m

ranges from 0 to 7. The value of n, given in lines, ranges from 1 to 255.

Channel 0 can be set via ESC B. The default value is m=0.

— This command is used to select one of the eight vertical tab channels. The value of m

ranges from 0 to 7.

Print Positioning 57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM vertical tabs in tab channels

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(24); ’form length 24 lines

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"b";CHR$(0);CHR$(2);CHR$(4);CHR$(6);CHR$(0)

40 REM Channels 0 tabs set at lines 2, 4, and 6

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"b";CHR$(1);CHR$(9);CHR$(11);CHR$(14);CHR$(0);

60 REM Channel 1 tabs set at lines 9, 11, and 14

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"/";CHR$(0);

80 REM Selects channel 0

90 LPRINT "Channel 0"

100 GOSUB 180

110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"/";CHR$(1);

120 REM Selects channel 1

130 LPRINT "Channel 1"

140 GOSUB 180

150 END

160 FOR I=1 TO 3

170 LPRINT CHR$(11);

180 LPRINT "VT Position #";I

190 NEXT

200 RETURN

58 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Absolute Vertical Print Position

ESC ( V

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "("

"V" <n_L> <n_H> <m_L><m_H>

set absolute vertical print pos.

1B 28 56 <n_L> <n_H> <m_L><m_H>

27 40 86 <n_L> <n_H> <m_L><m_H>

Valid values:

n_L= 2, n_H= 0

0 ≤ m_L≤ 255; 0 ≤ m_H≤ 127

Defines the vertical print position in units previously defined with the sequence ESC ( U

(see page 62).

(vertical position) = ((m_Hx 256) + m_L) x (defined unit) + (top-margin position)













((vertical position) − (top−margin position)) x

(defined unit)

m_H= INT

256









((vertical position) − (top−margin position)) x





(defined unit)

m_L= MOD

256

The default unit for this sequence is ⁄₃₆₀".

Only positions within a valid form can be achieved.

Positions below bottom margin will

a) eject paper (single sheet) and

b) set new position to top of form at next page.

Print Positioning 59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Relative Vertical Print Position

ESC ( v

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "("

"v" <n_L> <n_H> <m_L><m_H>

set relative vertical print pos.

1B 28 76 <n_L> <n_H> <m_L><m_H>

27 40 118 <n_L> <n_H> <m_L><m_H>

Valid values:

n_L= 2, n_H= 0

0 ≤ m_L≤ 255; 0 ≤ m_H≤ 127

Defines the vertical print position relatively up and down in units previously defined with

the sequence ESC ( U (see page 62).

(horizontal position) = ((m_Hx 256) + m_L) x (defined unit) + (current position)

Downwards:













((vertical position) − (current position)) x

(defined unit)

m_H= INT

256









((vertical position) − (current position)) x





(defined unit)

m_L= MOD

256

Upwards:









((current position) − (vertical position)) x





(defined unit)

m_H= 32768 – INT

256









((current position) − (vertical position)) x





(defined unit)

m_L= 32768 – MOD

256

60 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The default unit for this sequence is ⁄₃₆₀".

Only positions within a valid form can be achieved.

The current position is base for the newly defined relative positions.

Positions exceeding the defined top margin will be ignored.

Positions below bottom margin will

a) eject paper (single sheet) and

b) set new position to top of form at next page.

Print Positioning 61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Unit

ESC ( U

Data Structure ASCII

ESC "(" "U" <n_L> <n_H> <m>

1B 28 55 <n_L> <n_H> <m>

27 40 85 <n_L> <n_H> <m>

set unit

hex.

dec.

Description

Valid values:

n_L= 1, n_H= 0

m = 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60

Sets the units to

⁄₃₆₀₀inch.

Following commands are using this unit: ESC ( V

ESC ( v

ESC ( C

ESC ( c

The default values of these sequences is defined at ⁄₃₆₀inch.

62 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphics

Graphics 60 dpi

ESC K

ESC L

ESC Y

ESC Z

ESC *

Graphics 120 dpi

High Speed Graphics 120 dpi

Graphics 240 dpi

Graphic Modes

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "K" <n₁> <n₂>

1B 4B <n₁> <n₂>

27 75 <n₁> <n₂>

graphics 60 dpi

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "L" <n₁> <n₂>

1B 4C <n₁> <n₂>

27 76 <n₁> <n₂>

graphics 120 dpi

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "Y" <n₁> <n₂>

1B 59 <n₁> <n₂>

27 89 <n₁> <n₂>

high speed graphics 120 dpi

graphics 240 dpi

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "Z" <n₁> <n₂>

1B 5A <n₁> <n₂>

27 90 <n₁> <n₂>

ASCII

hex.

ESC " " <0> <n₁> <n₂>

1B 2A 00 <n₁> <n₂>

graphic modes

dec.

27 42

<n₁> <n₂>

Description

Data following the graphics ESC-sequence is printed out as a dot pattern. The number of

bytes of the graphics string is defined by n₁and n₂. You will find a list of all sequences

and the available parameter values m for the ESC * code sequences on the following

page.

Graphics 63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Density in dpi

(Dots per Inch)

Special

8 Point

Sequences

Adja-

cent

Dots

ESC * <m> ...

-Sequences

Needles

in use

Print Mode

horizont.

vertic.

ESC K...

ESC L...

ESC Y...

ESC * <0>...

single density

double density

possible

ESC * <1>...

ESC * <2>...

120

double density/

high speed

not

possible

ESC Z...

ESC * <3>...

quadruple density

240

not

possible

–

ESC * <4>...

ESC * <5>...

ESC * <6>...

ESC * <7>...

ESC * <32>...

ESC * <33>...

ESC * <38>...

ESC * <39>...

ESC * <40>...

screen graphics

plot (1:1)

possible

screen graphics II

plot (double density)

single density

144

180

double density

screen graphics II

triple density

120

180

360

sixfold density

not

possible

Example for Calculation of n₁and n₂:

The number of graphics data columns is 80.

n₂= number of data divided by 256

n₁= rest of division of n₂

= dec.80

⁄

256

= dec.0

= hex.50

= hex.00

64 Graphics

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Relationship between bits of graphics data and needles (9 needle version)

Each needle in a column is assigned a bit of the data byte.

Needle

Data Byte 1

Bit 7

•

Bit 6

•

Bit 5

•

Bit 4

•

Bit 3

•

Bit 2

•

Bit 1

•

Bit 0

•

Relationship between bits of graphics data and needles (24 needle version)

When using 24-pin graphics modes, three bytes of data are required for each dot column.

Needle

Data Byte 1

Bit 7

Needle

Data Byte 2

Bit 7

Needle

Data Byte 3

Bit 7

•

Bit 6

•

Bit 5

•

Bit 4

•

Bit 3

•

Bit 2

•

Bit 1

•

Bit 0

•

Graphics 65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphics and text can be mixed within one line.

If image data, lying outside the printable area, are input these data are ignored.

Example

10 REM bit image print

20 WIDTH "LPT1:",255

30 FOR i=0 TO 4:

LPRINT "Mode: ";STR$(i)

LPRINT CHR$(27);"*";CHR$(i);CHR$(254);CHR$(0);

FOR j=1 TO 127

LPRINT STRING$(1,64+16+4+1);STRING$(1,128+32+8+2);

NEXT j

LPRINT CHR$(10);CHR$(13)

100 NEXT i

110 END

66 Graphics

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select Graphics Mode

ESC ( G

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "("

"G" <n_L> <n_H> <m>

select graphics mode

1B 28 47 <n_L> <n_H> <m>

27 40 71 <n_L> <n_H> <m>

Valid values:

n_L= 1

n_H= 0

m = 1, 49

Enters graphics mode. Prepares printer for the sequence ESC . (see page 76).

Following sequences are valid after entering graphics mode:

ESC ( c

ESC ( C

ESC ( V

ESC ( v

ESC \

Set page format

Set page length in units

Set absolute vertical print position

Set relative vertical print position

Relative horizontal step

Absolute horizontal step

Select printing color

ESC $

ESC r

ESC U

ESC +

ESC ( U

ESC EM

ESC @

ESC .

Set/reset unidirectional printing

Variable line spacing n/360 inch

Set unit

Sheet feeder

Printer initialization

Print raster graphics

Line feed

Form feed

Carriage return

Graphics 67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The graphics mode can be exited with sequence ESC @ (see page 114).

In this mode text and graphics cannot be mixed on the same page.

This sequence does not allow text and user defined character printing.

Vertical and horizontal tab settings are cleared.

68 Graphics

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphics Mode Reassignment

ESC ?

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "?" <s> <n>

1B 3F <s> <n>

27 63 <s> <n>

reassign graphics mode

This code sequence redefines one of the four alternate bit image codes ESC K, ESC L,

ESC Y or ESC Z as one of the bit density numbers used with the ESC * <m>... code

sequence.

Available values are:

s =

75, 76, 89, 90 (ASCII = K, L, Y, Z)

n = 0

n = 1

n = 2

n = 3

n = 4

n = 5

n = 6

n = 7

n = 32

n = 33

n = 38

n = 39

n = 40

single density

double density

double density, high speed

quadruple density

screen graphics

plot graphics (1:1)

screen graphics II

plot graphics, double density

single density

double density

screen graphics II

triple density

sixfold density

For example, if you send the following code before you run a graphics program, it will

change every instance of mode K (single density) to mode 3 (quadruple density):

LPRINT CHR$(27);"?K";CHR$(3);

Graphics 69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM Reassigns graphics sequence

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"K";CHR$(60);CHR$(0);

30 REM Standard ESC K graphics sequence

40 FOR X=1 TO 60:REM

50 LPRINT CHR$(255);:REM

60 NEXT X:LPRINT

60 Columns

one byte per columns

70 LPRINT CHR$(27)"?K";CHR$(3)

80 REM Reassigns ESC K to quadruple density

90 LPRINT CHR$(27)"K";CHR$(60);CHR$(0);

100 FOR Z=1 TO 60:REM

60 Columns

110 LPRINT CHR$(255);CHR$(255);CHR$(255);

130 NEXT Z

140 END

70 Graphics

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphics Printing with 9 Print Dots

ESC ^

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "^" <m> <n₁> <n₂>

1B 5E <m> <n₁> <n₂>

27 94 <m> <n₁> <n₂>

With this Escape sequence, graphics printing with 9 print dots per dot row is selected. For

each row of dots two graphics bytes are required. The first byte controls the upper eight

print dots and the second controls only the lowest print dot.

m = 0 selects normal graphics resolution (60 dpi).

m = 1 selects double graphics resolution (120 dpi).

The data following the graphics ESC sequence are printed as a dot pattern. The parame-

ters n1 and n2 define the number of graphics bytes.

Print Head

Data Byte

Bit 7

Value

128

Needle 1

•

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Byte 1

Byte 2

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Bit 7

128

Graphics 71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example for the calculation of n1 and n2:

The number of graphics bytes is 80.

n₂

number of bytes divided by 256

⁄

256

dec.0

hex.00

n₁

remainder from division of n₂

dec.80

hex.50

Graphics and text data can be used in combination in a line.

For 9-print-dots-graphics-printing, two graphics bytes must be transferred per column.

72 Graphics

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Download Character Generator

General

Your printer offers you the possibility to design your own characters in normal print mode

(DPQ), in NLQ, NLQ proportional, LQ and LQ proportional. These characters can either

represent modified characters of the printer’s internal character sets or can replace other

characters.

These special characters, symbols, etc., can be defined in the Download Character Gen-

erator and then called “download characters” (DLL). You can define and store in the prin-

ters memory a maximum of 96 DLL characters.

00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

DC2

DC3

DC4

07 BEL

08 BS CAN

09 HT

0A LF

0B VT ESC

0C FF

0D CR

0E SO

0F SI

DEL

printable characters

If only single characters of an internal character set should be changed, it is possible to

copy the internal character set to the Download Character Generator and redefine these

single characters.

After power switch-off or initialization of the printer, the contents of the Download

Character Generator is lost. Download characters are possible in draft print quality

(DPQ), near letter quality (NLQ) and in letter quality (LQ).

Download Character Generator 73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To define download characters it is helpful to do this in a defined way:

Draft print quality or letter quality or letter quality proportional characters?

Superscript or subscript character, 12 cpi or 15 cpi character (DPQ + LQ)?

The desired print mode (DPQ or LQ or LQ proportional) must be selected in the printer.

Load characters from ROM to RAM using ESC : if necessary.

Define the new character in the RAM using ESC &.

Select the RAM character set using ESC %.

74 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copy ROM into RAM

ESC :

Data Structure

Description

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC ":"

1B 3A 00 <n> 00

27 58 <n> 0

NUL <n> NUL

copy ROM CG

This Escape sequence copies the specified character set (see ESC k <n>) from ROM or

from the font module to RAM. There the individual characters can be altered by the user.

10 REM

Copy ROM CG into Download CG

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);":";CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);

30 REM Select Download CG

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%";CHR$(1);CHR$(0);

50 LPRINT "[ \ ] ‘ { | } ~"

60 END

Download Character Generator 75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Raster Graphics

ESC .

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "."

1B 2E <c> <v> <h> <m> <n_L> <n_H> <d₁>...<d_x>

27 46 <c> <v> <h> <m> <n_L> <n_H> <d₁>...<d_x>

Valid values:

c = 0

c = 1

v = 10, 20

h = 10, 20

m = 1, 8, 24

0 ≤ n_L≤ 255

0 ≤ n_H≤ 127

0 ≤ d ≤ 255

This sequence supports following print densities:

v (dpi)

180

h (dpi)

180

1, 8 or 24

180

360

“ESC .” allows printing dot graphics in raster format. A compression algorithm is provided

for multiple printing of a particular byte of data.

76 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Description of parameters:

c = 0

c = 1

Normal mode (not compressed)

Data Length Encoding (DLE, compressed)

Vertical resolution in dpi: 360, 180 dpi

Horizontal resolution in dpi: 360, 180 dpi

Vertical dot count (rows of dot graphics)

Horizontal dot count (columns of dot graphics)

n_L, n_H

Calculating algorithm:

(horizontal dot count)

n_H= INT

256

(horizontal dot count)

n_L= MOD

256

Total number of data bytes

(n_Hx 256) + n_L+ 7

x = m x INT

During normal mode (c=0)

Graphics data

d₁... d_x

During DLE (c=1)

The first data byte is treated as a counter. Graphics data bytes then alternate

with a data counter byte:

0 ≤ (counter byte) ≤ 127

Download Character Generator 77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

“a”

Counter specifies the number of data bytes following:

(counter byte) + 1 = (number of data bytes to follow) or

(counter byte) = (number of data bytes to follow) – 1

128 ≤ (counter byte) ≤ 255

“b”

Counter specifies the number of times to repeat the next byte of data:

256 – (counter byte) + 1 = (number of times to repeat next byte)

(counter byte) = 257 – (number of times to repeat next byte)

Data which will exceed the right margin are discarded.

The vertical movement cannot be defined smaller than the current print density:

density must not be changed within Graphics Mode.

STOP

Avoid moving the print position upwards while in Graphics Mode.

This sequence is valid only in Graphics Mode ( ESC ( G, see page 67 ).

After printing raster graphics the actual print position is the most right dot + 1 dot

of the image.

Counter (a) and counter (b) can be mixed within the same sequence.

The dot count should be a multiple of 8. Otherwise the remaining data < 8 will be

discarded.

78 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Activate User Defined Character Set

ESC %

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

ESC "%" SOH

1B 25 01

activate user defined character set in RAM

dec.

27 37

ASCII

hex.

ESC "%" NUL

1B 25 00

activate normal character set in ROM or Font Card

dec.

27 37

Example

Example 30 LPRINT "[ \ ] ‘ { | } ~"

40 REM Copy ROM CG into Download CG

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);":";CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);

60 REM Select Download CG

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%";CHR$(1);

80 LPRINT "[ \ ] ‘ { | } ~"

90 END

Download Character Generator 79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Download Characters

ESC &

The sequence for the definition of download characters receives different parameters for

9 needle and 24 needle printers. Use the data structure available for your printer.

Definition of Draft Characters (9 Needle Printer)

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC &

1B 26 00 ...

27 38 ...

NUL <x> <y> <A> <n₁> <n₂> <n₃>...<n₁₁>

define

download

characters

first character to be redefined

last character to be redefined

an attribute which consists of descending data and proportional data

(see “Computing the Attribute”)

n₁

n₂

n₃

needle information for column 1

needle information for column 2

needle information for column 3

n₁₁

needle information for column 11

This code sequence assigns the character pattern defined by n₁, n₂, n₃to n₁₁as down-

load character to ASCII codes x to y. If the download character is only being assigned to

one character code, specify x = y. "A" determines the descender and proportional print

attributes.

80 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Defining Character (9 Needle Printer)

COLUMNS

9 10 11 12

Each downloaded character is defined in a matrix

field of 9 rows high and 12 columns wide.

COLUMNS

9 10 11

It is only possible to use column 1 up to column 11.

Column 12 is the space between one character

and the next. Therefore it is always left blank by

automatically setting dots in column 12 to zero.

128

Also, only 8 of 9 dots in any one column can be

printed (see also “Descenders”).

Each column is defined by a single byte where

each row in that column corresponds to the LSB

(dec.1) and the top row to the MSB (dec.128).

Download Character Generator 81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example (9 needle printer):

COLUMNS

9 10 11

The following example illustrates the definition of a

character, the copyright symbol (a small “c” in a

circle), instead of the character “@”.

The evaluation of the bytes in each column is as follows:

128

=128

=16

=128

= 64

= 32

=16

= 8

= 32

= 8

= 32

= 8

= 32

=16

= 8

= 4

= 8

= 2

= 56

= 68

=146

= 40

=130

= 40

=130

= 68

= 56

Totals

= 0

82 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

Download Character Definition

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"x";CHR$(0);:REM select draft print quality

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"&";CHR$(0);"@@";CHR$(139);

40 LPRINT CHR$(56);CHR$(68);CHR$(146);CHR$(40);

50 LPRINT CHR$(130);CHR$(40);CHR$(130);CHR$(68);

60 LPRINT CHR$(56);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%";CHR$(1);CHR$(0);

80 LPRINT "@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @"

90 END

Attribute “A” (9 needle printer)

Attribute “A” consists of descender data and proportional data. The descender data deter-

mines whether or not the ninth needle will be used, and the proportional data determines

the starting and ending positions of the character in the print area.

COLUMNS

Descenders (9 needle printer)

9 10 11 12

Some characters, like “g” or “y”, extend below the

line. To define a character that extends below the

line, the ninth needle, which corresponds to row 0

of the matrix field, must be used. Characters which

use row 0 cannot use the top needle or row 8 of

the matrix field.

Bit 8 of the attribute determines whether the matrix-

field is shifted down one row or not.

Normal matrix field (row 1 up to row 8) is used by

setting bit 8 to 1.

Descender matrix field (row 0 up to row 7) is used

by setting bit 8 to 0 (See “Computing the Attribute”).

normal

descender

Download Character Generator 83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Proportional Data (9 needle printer)

Not all characters are the same size. “W” is considerably wider than “i”. In the proportional

print mode, it is necessary to specify how much space a character takes by specifying the

first and last printable columns in that character’s matrix.

Seven bits of the attribute are used for specifying the print position of a character within

its matrix. The three high-order bits of the seven bits of proportional data represent the

starting position of the character in the print area and the remaining four bits indicate the

ending position.

All characters in proportional mode are printed as emphasized characters. Therefore,

when defining a download character for printing in proportional mode, specify the ending

print position one or more blank columns greater than the actual width of the character.

This is also true for enlarged mode.

The maximum print area width of a download character is 12 columns, but column 12

must be blank, or if dots are specified in this column, they will automatically set to 0. The

minimum width of a download character is 5 columns. All of the download character data

n₁to n₁₁must be sent to the printer. Note also that, if horizontally adjacent dots are

specified, they will be automatically ignored.

Computing the Attribute (9 needle printer)

The 8 bits that make up attribute A are broken down as follows:

Bit

dec.

128

Part 1

Part 2

When using normal matrix field, this bit is 1.

For descending matrix field it is 0.

These 3 bits specify the first

column of the proportional character.

Part 3

These 4 bits specify the last column of the

proportional character.

84 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Just add up the values of the three parts of the byte to get the value of A.

Normal

Descender

128

First column is 1

First column is 2

First column is 3

First column is 4

First column is 5

First column is 6

First column is 7

First column is 8

112

Last column is 5

Last column is 6

Last column is 7

Last column is 8

Last column is 9

Last column is 10

Last column is 11

Last column is 12

Example:

Descender matrix field

First column is 3

Last column is 10

Total value of <A>

Download Character Generator 85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Normal matrix field

First column is 1

Last column is 12

128

Total value of <A>

139

Normal matrix field

First column is 4

Last column is 9

128

Total value of <A>

184

86 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

Copy US ASCII caracter set

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(0);

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);":";CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);

40 REM Define character into # code and 4 code

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"&";CHR$(0);"#$";

60 REM First character without descenter

70 LPRINT CHR$(137);

80 LPRINT CHR$(56);CHR$(68);CHR$(146);CHR$(40);

90 LPRINT CHR$(130);CHR$(40);CHR$(130);CHR$(68);

100 LPRINT CHR$(56);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);

110 REM Second character with descender

120 LPRINT CHR$(9);

130 LPRINT CHR$(56);CHR$(68);CHR$(146);CHR$(40);

140 LPRINT CHR$(130);CHR$(40);CHR$(130);CHR$(68);

150 LPRINT CHR$(56);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);

160 REM Select Download Character Generator

170 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%";CHR$(1);CHR$(0);

180 LPRINT "*** Draft print quality ***"

190 PRINT

200 LPRINT "First character without descender ---> ##########"

210 LPRINT "Second character with descender -----> $$$$$$$$$$"

220 LPRINT "Both characters mixed ---------------> #$#$#$#$#$"

230 LPRINT :LPRINT :LPRINT

240 LPRINT CHR$(27);"p1";

250 LPRINT "*** Proportional mode ***"

260 LPRINT

270 LPRINT "First character without descender ---> ##########"

280 LPRINT "Second character with descender -----> $$$$$$$$$$"

290 LPRINT "Both characters mixed ---------------> #$#$#$#$#$"

300 END

Download Character Generator 87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Definition of NLQ Characters (9 needle printer)

The definition of NLQ characters is more comprehensive than the definition of draft char-

acters, since a larger number of dots is required.

User-defined NLQ characters can only be generated in the NLQ mode of the printer.

Data structure

Description

ASCII

ESC "&" NUL <x> <y> <d₀> <d₁> <d₂> <n₁>...<n_k> (data 1. character)

<d₀> <d₁> <d₂> <n₁>...<n_k> (data 2. character)

1B 26 00

hex.

dez.

27 38

first character to be redefined

last character to be redefined

d₀

leading space of the character

d₁

d₂

number of columns of the defineded character

following space of the character

number of data bytes to transmit

data bytes (3 data-bytes for one column)

n₁...n_k

Values of parameters:

0 ≤ d₀≤ 20

0 ≤ d₁≤ 20

0 ≤ d₂≤ 20

k = 3 ∗ d₁

If only a single download character is to be defined, x = y is to be set.

When this command is transferred to the printer, first of all, all data in the print buffer are

output.

88 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Definition of the Character Grid

NLQ characters consist of

18 vertical dots and 12 hori-

zontal dots.

128

Within this grid every num-

bered line or gap can be oc-

cupied, including the lowest

and the furthest right line.

You should, however, leave

one or two columns empty,

so that neighboring charac-

ters do not touch.

128

9 10 11 12

For each column of the NLQ

character it is necessary to de-

fine 3 Bytes. Each bit of the

data bytes corresponds to a

certain value. The example on

the right shows the as-

signment of print dots to data

bytes and the calculation of

the values.

128

First

Data Byte

= 229

128

In order to determine the nu-

meric value of a column, it is

necessary to first of all add the

values of the 3 bytes separa-

tely. A byte with no print dot

receives the numeric value 9.

Second

Data Byte

= 28

= 64

Third

Data Byte

128

Download Character Generator 89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following example shows a user-defined arrow with the list of the individual column

values (each 3 byte) which must be transferred to the printer.

128

9 10 11 12

255

Data byte 1

Data byte 2

Data byte 3

128 192 128

See next page for the corresponding programming example.

90 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"x";CHR$(1);

110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"&";CHR$(0);";;";

120 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(12);CHR$(0);

130 FOR I=1 TO 36

140 READ D

150 LPRINT CHR$(0);

160 NEXT I

170 LPRINT "; ; ; ; ; ;"

180 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%";CHR$(1);

190 LPRINT "; ; ; ; ; ;"

200 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%";CHR$(0);

210 LPRINT "; ; ; ; ; ;"

220 END

230 DATA 0,8,0,0,4,0,0,2,0,0,1,0

240 DATA 0,0,128,255,255,192,0,0,128,0,1,0

250 DATA 0,2,0,0,4,0,0,8,0,0,0,0

Download Character Generator 91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

24 needle printer

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

ESC "&" NUL <x> <y> <d₀> <d₁> <d₂> n₁...n₃(data first character)

<d₀> <d₁> <d₂> n₁...n₃(data second character) ...

1B 26 ...

27 38 ...

hex.

dec.

first character to be redefined

last character to be redefined

d₀

leading space of the character

d₁

d₂

number of columns of the defineded character

following space of the character

n₁...n₃

three data bytes for one column in DPQ and LQ, two data bytes for

superscript or subscript characters or 15 cpi character (DPQ + LQ)

If the download character is only being assigned one character code, specify x = y.

Limitations for d₀, d₁and d₂

print quality

d₀

d₁

d₂

d₀+d₁+d₂

DPQ 10 cpi

DPQ 12 cpi

DPQ 15 cpi

LQ 10 cpi

LQ 12 cpi

LQ 15 cpi

≥ 0 ≤ 12 ≥ 0 ≤ 12

≥ 0 ≤ 10 ≥ 0 ≤ 10

≥ 0 ≤ 8 ≥ 0 ≤ 8

≥ 0 ≤ 36 ≥ 0 ≤ 36

≥ 0 ≤ 30 ≥ 0 ≤ 30

≥ 0 ≤ 24 ≥ 0 ≤ 24

≥ 0 ≤ 42 ≥ 0 ≤ 42

≥ 0 ≤ 37 ≥ 0 ≤ 37

LQ proportional

LQ super/subscript

If defined character density (10/12/15 cpi) is selected, d₀and d₂will be ignored and the

defined character is centered.

If more columns than d₁will be defined for one character, it is printed more to the right

and can overlap the next character. The absolute limit for d₁is 15 columns in DPQ and

42 columns in LQ.

92 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For LQ proportional only, it is necessary to define all 41 columns; column 42 should be

free. All other print modes use the number of columns as defined by d₁.

Superscript and subscript characters and 15 cpi characters can be assigned needles 1 to

16. The super and sub shifting will be done by corresponding escape sequence.

If the same needle is set to print adjacent columns, the printer will ignore one of them, i.e.

it will print in alternating order.

Example:

Needles

128

• • • • • •

•

Byte 1

•

Byte 2

•

• • • • •

•

Byte 3

•

• • • • • •

•

• • • •

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

15 16 32 64 128

128

255

Code 1

Code 2

Code 3

255

128 64 32 16

240

Download Character Generator 93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

Download Character Definition

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"x1"

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"&";CHR$(0);"AA";

40 LPRINT CHR$(5);CHR$(30);CHR$(0);

50 LPRINT CHR$(15);CHR$(255);CHR$(0);

60 LPRINT CHR$(16);CHR$(0);CHR$(128);

70 LPRINT CHR$(32);CHR$(0);CHR$(64);

80 LPRINT CHR$(64);CHR$(0);CHR$(32);

90 LPRINT CHR$(128);CHR$(0);CHR$(16);

100 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(8);

110 LPRINT CHR$(128);CHR$(0);CHR$(4);

120 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(2);

130 LPRINT CHR$(128);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);

140 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);

150 LPRINT CHR$(128);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);

160 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);

170 LPRINT CHR$(128);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);

180 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);

190 LPRINT CHR$(255);CHR$(0);CHR$(1);

200 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(128);CHR$(0);

210 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(64);CHR$(2);

220 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(32);CHR$(4);

230 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(16);CHR$(8);

240 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(8);CHR$(16);

250 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(4);CHR$(0);

260 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(16);

270 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(4);CHR$(0);

280 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(16);

290 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(4);CHR$(0);

300 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(16);

310 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(4);CHR$(0);

320 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(16);

330 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(4);CHR$(0);

340 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(3);CHR$(240);

350 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%";CHR$(1);CHR$(0);

360 LPRINT:LPRINT

370 LPRINT "AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA"

380 LPRINT CHR$(27);"x0"

390 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%";CHR$(0);CHR$(0);

400 LPRINT

410 LPRINT "AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA"

420 END

94 Download Character Generator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Miscellaneous

Print Data as Characters

ESC ( ^

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "("

"^" <n_L> <n_H> <d₁>...<d_n>

print data as characters

1B 28 54 <n_L> <n_H> <d₁>...<d_n>

27 40 94 <n_L> <n_H> <d₁>...<d_n>

Valid values:

0 ≤ n_L≤ 255

0 ≤ n_H≤ 127

Data bytes d₁to d_nare printed as characters rather than control codes.

k = ((n_Hx 256) + n_L)

n_H= INT

256

n_L= MOD

256

Data is ignored if no character is assigned to that character in the active character table.

Miscellaneous 95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing Direction unidirectional for one line

Set/Reset Unidirectional Printing

ESC <

ESC U

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "<"

1B 3C

27 60

unidirectional printing for one line

set/reset unidirectional printing

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "U" <n> or n

1B 55 <n> or n

27 85 <n> or n

Description

– This code sequence sets unidirectional printing mode only for one line. The printing is

carried out from left to right.

— This code sequence sets or resets unidirectional printing mode. Unidirectional printing

is enabled when 1 is specified for n and is disabled when 0 is specified.

In text mode, printing is faster when unidirectional printing is disabled. However, char-

acters on one line may be slightly shifted with respect to those in the preceding line

when bidirectional printing is used.

In its default setting the printer is set to bidirectional printing.

96 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Half-Speed Printing

ESC s

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "s" <n>

1B 73 <n>

27 115 <n>

Description

Example

With n=1 the print speed is reduced by half. The result is a lower printer noise level.

With n=0 the normal print speed is set.

10 REM

20 LPRINT "This is full speed print in LQ mode"

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"s";CHR$(1);:REM set half speed

40 LPRINT "This is half speed print in LQ mode"

50 LPRINT " (Quiet Mode)

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"s";CHR$(0);:REM

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"x";CHR$(0):REM

80 LPRINT "This is full speed print in draft mode"

90 LPRINT CHR$(27);"s";CHR$(1);:REM set half speed

selects half-speed printing

Set full speed

Set draft mode"

100 LPRINT "This is half speed print in draft mode"

110 LPRINT "

120 LPRINT CHR$(28);"@"

130 END

(Quiet Mode)

’Resets printer

Miscellaneous 97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Single n/180 Inch or n/216 Inch Line Feed

Single n/180 Inch or n/216 Inch Back Feed

ESC J

ESC j

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "J" <n>

1B 4A <n>

27 74 <n>

n/180 inch line feed

n/216 inch line feed

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "j"

<n>

n/180 inch back feed

n/216 inch back feed

1B 6A <n>

27 106 <n>

Description

– When the printer receives this code sequence it advances the paper by ⁄

inches

180

(24 needle printer) or by ⁄

inches (9 neadle printer). This sequence does not effect

216

a CR (reset line pointer).

— When the printer receives this code sequence it moves the paper backwards by

⁄

inches (24 needle printer) or by ⁄

inches (9 needle printer).

180

216

Unlike an ordinary line feed code, code ESC J does not advance the paper to the top of

the next page when the print position enters the perforation area (Perforation-skip operati-

on is not performed). The value specified for n must be in the range of 0 to 255. This code

sequence does not affect the amount by which the paper is advanced by subsequent LF

or VT codes.

98 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Colour Selection

ESC r

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "r"

1B 72 <n>

27 114 <n>

<n>

According to the value specified for n one of the subsequent colours is selected:

black

magenta

cyan

blue

yellow

red

black

red

blue

violet

yellow

orange

green

The available colours depend on the ribbon used. The ribbon used must be matched in

the user menu (PRINTER OPTIONS, RIBBON OPTIONS). If a ribbon with several black

tracks is used, then it is automatically switched every 60 lines between the black tracks.

The relationship between the track and the ribbon colour for various ribbon cassettes is

shown in the following table:

track

magenta, cyan,

yellow, black ribbon

red, green, blue,

black ribbon

3 ∗ black, red ribbon

black

cyan

black

blue

black

red

magenta

yellow

red

green

Miscellaneous 99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The relationship between colour selection sequences and the resulting colours for several

ribbon cassettes is shown in the following table:

selected colour

magenta, cyan,

yellow, black ribbon

red, green, blue,

black ribbon

3 ∗ black, red ribbon

black

red

black

red *)

black

red

black

red

green

yellow

blue

green **)

yellow

green

blue

red

****)

red

blue ***)

magenta

cyan

magenta

cyan

blue

****)

***

****

the red is made from yellow + magenta

the green is made from yellow + cyan

the blue is made from magenta + cyan

Sequence is ignored

two-pass print is automatically executed

}

Example

10 REM

colour selection

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"r";CHR$(5);

30 LPRINT "this is written with red colour"

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"r";CHR$(3);

50 LPRINT "this is written with blue colour"

60 END

100 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

International Character Sets

ESC R

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "R" <n>

1B 52 <n>

27 82 <n>

select international character set

According to the value specified for n the corresponding international character set can

be selected:

USA

France

Germany

United Kingdom (UK)

Denmark I

Sweden

Italy

Spain I

Japan

Norway

Denmark II

Spain II

Latin America

Corea

Legal

For character sets see Appendix B.

Miscellaneous 101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

international character sets

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(0) ;"ASCII

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(1) ;"FRANCE

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(2) ;"GERMANY

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(3) ;"UK

";:GOSUB 160

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(4) ;"DENMARK I

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(5) ;"SWEDEN

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(6) ;"ITALY

90 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(7) ;"SPAIN I

100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(8) ;"JAPAN

110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(9) ;"NORWAY

120 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(10);"DENMARK II :

130 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(11);"SPAIN II

140 LPRINT CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(12);"LATIN AMERICA:

150 END

160 LPRINT CHR$(35);CHR$(36);CHR$(64);CHR$(91);

170 LPRINT CHR$(92);CHR$(93);CHR$(94);CHR$(96);

180 LPRINT CHR$(123);CHR$(124);CHR$(125);CHR$(126);

190 RETURN

102 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Sets

ESC t

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "t"

1B 74 <d₁>

27 116 <d₁>

<d₁>

select character table

Valid values:

0 ≤ d₁≤ 3, 48 ≤ d₁≤ 51

By means of this code sequence the upper half of character code table

(dec. 128 to dec. 255) can be selected.

default

italic

Description

The Epson Standard Character

Set is selected. The upper half

contains control codes and italic

characters.

d₁= 0 or 48

d₁= 1 or 49

Character table 0

The Epson Graphic Character Set

is selected. The upper half

Character table 1 Table 437

contains international and graphic

characters (see IBM Character

Set 2, from hex.A0 to hex.FF)

The upper half contains user-

defined characters, if created by

ESC &. When creating characters,

assign code value in the range of

0 to 127. For using add 128 to the

codes. Using of n = 2 without user-

defined characters causes same

contents of upper and lower half

of the character code table.

d₁= 2 or 50

Character table 2

DLL *)

The IBM Code Page Table 437

is selected

d₁= 3 or 5

Character table 3 Table 437

user defined character set

Miscellaneous 103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You can either register 0 - 3. Register 3 is only available in ESC/P2 mode.

The command ESC ( t can be used to assign character sets to character table (d₁).

If d₁= 2 you cannot use user-defined characters defined previously with ESC ( t

(see page 105).

Example

10 REM upper half of code table

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"t0";

30 GOSUB 90

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"t1";

50 GOSUB 90

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"t2";

70 GOSUB 90

80 END

90 RESTORE

100 FOR I = 1 TO 15

110 READ D

120 LPRINT CHR$(D);

130 NEXT I

140 LPRINT

150 RETURN

160 DATA 65,66,67,68,69,165,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174

104 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Assign Character Table

ESC ( t

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "("

"t"

<n_L> <n_H> <d₁> <d₂> <d₃>

assign character table

1B 28 74 <n_L> <n_H> <d₁> <d₂> <d₃>

27 40 116 <n_L> <n_H> <d₁> <d₂> <d₃>

Valid values:

n_L= 3, n_H= 0

0 ≤ d₁≤ 3, 48 ≤ d₁≤ 51

0 ≤ d₂≤ 255

0 ≤ d₃≤ 255

Assignes the choosen character table to the register d₁(0 - 3). The ESC t command

(see page 103) can be used to activate the defined character set.

d₂

d₃

Table name

Italic

Table 437 (US)

Table 850 (Multilingual)

Table 860 (Portugal)

Table 863 (Canada-French)

Table 865 (Norway)

Table 852 (East Europe)

Table 857 (Turkish)

Table 866 (Russian)

Table 861 (Iceland)

BRASCII

(continued on next page)

Miscellaneous 105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d₂

d₃

Table name

Abicomp

ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1)

Roman 8

127

ISO 8859-2 (Latin 2)

Please refer to the printer’s reference manual which character sets are supported.

106 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Data Control Bit 8 = 1

ESC >

ESC =

ESC #

Input Data Control Bit 8 = 0

Input Data Control Bit 8 unchanged

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC ">"

1B 3E

27 62

set bit 8 = 1

set bit 8 = 0

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "="

1B 3D

27 61

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "#"

1B 23

27 35

Removing the settings set for Bit 8 (MSB, most significant bit),

which were set with the use of either ESC = or ESC >

Example

10 REM

input data control

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"#";

30 GOSUB 90

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);">";

50 GOSUB 90

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"=";

70 GOSUB 90

80 END

90 FOR I=97 TO 103:LPRINT CHR$(I);:NEXT I

100 FOR I=161 TO 167:LPRINT CHR$(I);:NEXT I

110 LPRINT LPRINT

120 RETURN

Miscellaneous 107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sheet Feeder

ESC EM

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC EM "0"

1B 19 30

27 25 48

deactivate sheet feeder operation

select magazine 1 (front)

select magazine 2 (rear)

activate sheet feeder operation

eject paper

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC EM "1"

1B 19 31

27 25 49

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC EM "2"

1B 19 32

27 25 50

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC EM "4"

1B 19 34

27 25 51

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC EM "R"

1B 19 52

27 25 82

Description

This code sequence should only be used when the sheet feeder is mounted and se-

lected. Parameters for sheet feeder operation set via the control panel are deactivated.

When sheet feeder operation is activated, the paper is fed automatically by a received

code FF. If the last print position is outside the defined print area, the paper will additio-

nally be fed by codes LF, VT, or ESC J.

The form length must be defined in accordance with the paper format used.

108 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM sheet feeder

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(25);"1";

30 LPRINT "This text is on a form"

40 LPRINT "from magazine one."

50 LPRINT CHR$(12);:REM form feed

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(25);"2";

70 LPRINT "This text is on a form"

80 LPRINT "from magazine two."

90 END

Miscellaneous 109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Code Area Expansion ON

Print Code Area Expansion OFF

ESC 6

ESC 7

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "6"

1B 36

27 54

print ASCII codes 128 to 159 and 255

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "7"

1B 37

27 55

suppress ASCII codes 128 to 159 and 255

Description

– This code sequence causes the printout of the higher control codes (ASCII 128 to 159

and 255) in the form of characters and symbols instead of the repetition of the functi-

ons of ASCII codes 0 to 31 and 127.

For this function the Graphic character set must be selected by ESC t <1> or by menu

(see IBM Character Set 2, from hex.80 to hex.9F).

— When the printer receives this code sequence, the ASCII codes 128 to 159 and 255

are used as duplicates of the functions of the lower control codes 0 to 31 and 127.

For character sets see Appendix B.

110 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

code aera expansion

15 LPRINT CHR$(27);"t1";

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"6";

30 GOSUB 70

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"7";

50 GOSUB 70

60 END

70 RESTORE

80 FOR I = 1 TO 12

90 READ D

100 LPRINT CHR$(D);

110 NEXT I

120 LPRINT

130 RETURN

140 DATA 65,66,67,68,69,128,129,130,131,132,133,134

Miscellaneous 111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Activate/Deactivate Graphics Characters

ESC m

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "m" <n>

1B 6D <n>

27 109 <n>

On receipt of this command, the ASCII codes hex.90 to hex.9F can be output as special

graphics characters.

Valid values for n are:

n = 0 (hex.00) activates the control codes

n = 4 (hex.04) activates the graphics characters

Activate/Deactivate Direct Print Mode

ESC i

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "i"

1B 69 <n> or n

27 105 <n> or n

<n> or n

In this mode no complete lines from the print buffer are printed, but each character is prin-

ted immediately on receipt of the character, just like in a typewriter. In addition the printer

pushes the paper up, so that the user can immediately see the printed character and then

pulls the page down again to continue printing.

Valid values for n are:

n = 1 (dec.1 or dec.49, hex.01 or hex.31)

n = 0 (dec.0 or dec.48, hex.00 or hex.30)

activates the mode

deactivates the mode

112 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

International Code Table

ESC I

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "I"

1B 49 <n> or n

27 73 <n> or n

<n> or n

The ASCII codes hex.00 to hex.1F (dec.0 to dec.31) and hex.80 to hex.9F (dec.128 to

dec.159) are as a rule assigned with non-printable characters. These codes can, how-

ever, be converted to printable characters using ESC I.

Valid values for n are either ASCII code hex.00 and hex.01 or ASCII characters "0" and

"1" (hex.30 and hex.31).

n = 1 (hex.01 or hex.31)

n = 0 (hex.00 or hex.30)

➜

Access to user-defined or international characters.

Hex.00 to hex.1F and hex.80 to hex.9F

assigned with non-printable codes.

For character sets see appendix B "Character Sets".

Miscellaneous 113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer Initialization

ESC @

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "@"

1B 40

27 64

printer initialization

Printer initialization means that the printer is in the same state as it is after switch-on. All

parameters set by means of ESC sequences are cleared.

All print data transferred after the last print control code (CR, LF ...) are lost. For this

reason first send the respective print control code (CR, LF) and then the ESC @

sequence.

Example

10 REM initialization

15 LPRINT CHR$(27);"l";CHR$(10):REM set left margin

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(15):REM set condensed

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"G":REM set NLQ

35 LPRINT CHR$(27);"S1";:REM set subscript

40 GOSUB 90

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"@";

80 GOSUB 90

90 END

100 LPRINT "Matrix Printer"

110 LPRINT:LPRINT

120 END

114 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Activate Paper End Sensor

Deactivate Paper End Sensor

ESC 8

ESC 9

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "8"

1B 38

27 56

Deactivate paper end sensor

Activate paper end sensor

–

—

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "9"

1B 39

27 57

Description

– This sequence deactivates the paper end sensor, so that a cut sheet can be printed all

the way to the bottom. With the sheet feeder activated this command is ignored.

— Activates the paper end sensor. As soon as a certain area near the lower paper edge

is reached, an acoustic signal sounds and the printing process is interrupted.

Miscellaneous 115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control Codes

BEL (hex.07)

(dec.7)

Sounds acoustic signal.

(hex.08)

(dec.8)

Print contents of line buffer, then move the print head one position back. When auto right

justification is selected by code sequence ESC a<3>, <BS> will be ignored.

CAN (hex.18)

(dec.24)

When the printer receives this code, the print buffer is deleted. This code only clears the

contents of the print buffer; it does not affect any control codes which have previously

been sent to the printer.

CR (hex.0D)

(dec.13)

When the printer receives this code, it prints any data in the print buffer and resets the

line pointer to the left margin.

Code CR can also give a line feed if automatic line feed is selected. Refer to the

Operator’s Manual.

DC1 (hex.11)

(dec.17)

The control code DC1 switches the printer into Online Mode. If the printer has been set

Offline with the control code DC3, then DC1 is the only control code which can be carried

out. DC1 has no effect if the printer has been set Offline via the control panel.

DC1 and DC3 have no effect if the Centronics interface signal SELECT is switched off

(LOW).

DC2 (hex.12)

(dec.18)

Reset condensed print mode.

DC3 (hex.13)

(dec.19)

The control code DC3 switches the printer into Offline Mode. If the printer has been set

Offline with the control code DC3, then DC1 (switching printer Online) is the only control

code which can be carried out. If the printer has been switched Offline via DC3, it can

only be switched into the Online mode again using DC1 and not via the control panel.

DC1 and DC3 have no effect if the Centronics interface signal SELECT is switched off

(LOW).

DC4 (hex.14)

(dec.20)

Reset enlarged print mode set by <SO>.

116 Control Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DEL (hex.7F)

(dec.127)

Clear previous characters in the print buffer.

ESC (hex.1B)

(dec.27)

Start character for a subsequent program sequence.

(hex.0C)

(dec.12)

When the printer receives this code, it prints the data in the print buffer, then advances

the paper from the current print position to the top-of-form position on the next page.

The next line is beginning at the left margin.

(hex.09)

(dec.9)

This code causes the following characters to be printed starting from the first horizontal

tab stop after the current print position. When the printer is switched on, tab stops are

set at every eighth print position.

The amount by which the print position is shifted by tabulation depends on the selected

character spacing. When horizontal tabulation is carried out e.g. at a position being ten

spaces to the right of the current print position, code HT will shift printing in normal mode

one inch to the right. Except for enlarged mode, the print position at which the character

spacing is changed is defined as the first column provided that character spacing is

changed within a line.

If there are no tab stops following the current print position, code HT is ignored. If the

next tab stop exceeds the right margin, the printer carries out a carriage return and line

feed on receipt of this code.

(hex.0A)

(dec.10)

When the printer receives this code, it prints all the data in the print buffer and then

advances the paper by one line.

The amount by which the paper is advanced depends on the current line spacing.

NUL (hex.00)

(dec.0)

Null

(hex.0F)

(dec.15)

Selection of condensed print mode.

SO (hex.0E)

(dec.14)

Code for double width print within one line (enlarged printing).

Control Codes 117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOH (hex.01)

(dec.01)

Start Of Heading.

(hex.20)

(dec.32)

Space

(hex.0B)

(dec.11)

When the printer receives this code, it prints the data in the print buffer and then advances

the paper to the next vertical tab stop position.

The next character is printed in the column following the last print position, if no CR is

transmitted.

The amount by which the paper is advanced varies depending on line spacing.

When the printer is switched on, no vertical tab stops are set.

If there are no vertical tab stops between the current print position and the end of the

page, or if there are no vertical tabs set, VT assumes the same function as LF.

118 Control Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A

Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sorted by sequences

Sequence

Function

Page

BEL

CAN

DEL

DC1

DC2

DC3

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔

Bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Control Code BS (Backspace) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Control Code CAN (Cancel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Control Code CR (Carriage Return) . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Control Code DEL (Delete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

set printer online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

reset condensed print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

set printer offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

reset enlarged print mode (set by <SO> or ESC <SO>) . 116

Control Code ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

print mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

input data control bit 8 unchanged . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

absolute horizontal step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

select download character generator . . . . . . . . . . . 79

select ROM character generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

define draft download characters (9 needle version) . . . 80

define NLQ download characters (9 needle version) . . . 88

define download characters (24 needle version) . . . . . 92

score selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

print data as characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

DC4

ESC

ESC !<n>

ESC #

ESC $<n1><n2>

ESC % NUL

ESC % <1>

ESC & NUL <x> <y> <A> ...

ESC & NUL <x> <y> <d₀> ...

ESC ( - <3> NUL <n1> <n2>

ESC ( ^

✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔

ESC ( C

ESC ( c

set page length in units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

set page format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

✔

ESC ( G

ESC ( t

ESC ( U

ESC ( V

ESC ( v

ESC * <0><n1><n2>

ESC * <1><n1><n2>

ESC * <2> <n1> <n2>

ESC * <3><n1><n2>

ESC * <4><n1><n2>

select graphics mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

assign character table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

set unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

set absolute vertical print position . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

set relative vertical print position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

graphics 60 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 120 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

high speed graphics 120 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 240 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 80 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

A-2 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sequence

Function

Page

ESC * <5><n1><n2>

ESC * <6><n1><n2>

ESC * <7><n1><n2>

ESC * <32> <n1> <n2>

ESC * <33> <n1> <n2>

ESC * <38> <n1> <n2>

ESC * <39> <n1> <n2>

ESC * <40> <n1> <n2>

ESC .

ESC + <n>

ESC - <n>

ESC / <m>

ESC : NUL <n> NUL

ESC <

ESC =

✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔

graphics 72 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 90 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 144 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 60 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 120 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 90 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 180 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 360 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

print raster graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

variable line spacing n/360 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

underline mode ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

vertical tab channel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

copy ROM character generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

unidirectional printing for one line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

input data control bit 8 = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

input data control bit 8 = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

reassign graphics mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

printer initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

relative horizontal step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

select 9 dots graphics mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔

ESC >

ESC ? <s> <0>

ESC ? <s> <1>

ESC ? <s> <2>

ESC ? <s> <3>

ESC ? <s> <4>

ESC ? <s> <5>

ESC ? <s> <6>

ESC ? <s> <7>

ESC ? <s> <32>

ESC ? <s> <33>

ESC ? <s> <38>

ESC ? <s> <39>

ESC ? <s> <40>

ESC @

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔

ESC \ <n1> <n2>

ESC ^<m> <n1> <n2>

Summary of Possible Codes A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sequence

Function

Page

ESC 0

ESC 1

ESC 2

ESC 3 <n>

ESC 4

ESC 5

ESC 6

ESC 7

ESC 8

ESC 9

ESC A <n>

ESC a <n>

ESC B NUL

ESC B <n1>...<n16> NUL

ESC b <m> NUL

ESC b <m> <n> NUL

ESC c

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔

set line feed to 1/8 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

set line feed to 7/72 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

set line feed to 1/6 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

set line feed to n/216 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

italic mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

italic mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

print ASCII codes 128 to 159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

suppress ASCII codes 128 to 159 . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

paper end sensor, deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

paper end sensor, activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

line feed n/60 inch or n/72 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

justification and centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

reset all vertical tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

vertical tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

clear all tab settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

vertical tab stops in channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

set HMI (horizontal motion index) . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

ESC C NUL <n>

ESC C <n>

ESC D NUL

ESC D <n1>...<n32> NUL

ESC E

form length in inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

form length in lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

clear all horizontal tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

horizontal tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

emphasized mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

horizontal and vertical step width . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

deselect sheet feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

sheet feeder (magazine 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

sheet feeder (magazine 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

select sheet feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

sheet feeder (eject paper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

emphasized mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

horizontal step forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

vertical step forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

double strike print mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

ESC e

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

ESC EM 0

ESC EM 1

ESC EM 2

ESC EM 4

ESC EM R

ESC F

ESC f NUL <n>

ESC f SOH <n>

ESC G

✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

A-4 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sequence

Function

Page

ESC g

ESC H

ESC I <n>

ESC i

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔

character density 15 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

double strike print mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

printout of control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

direct print mode, activate/deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . 112

line feed n/216 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

back feed n/216 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

graphics 60 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

font type selection (Roman) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

font type selection (Gothic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

font type selection (Courier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

font type selection (Prestige) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

font type selection (Script) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

font type selection (OCR-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

font type selection (OCR-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

font type selection (Orator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

font type selection (Orator-S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

graphics 120 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

left margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

character density 12 cpi (Elite) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

graphics characters activate/deactivate . . . . . . . . . 112

perforation skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

reset perforation skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

character density 10 cpi (Pica) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

proportional spacing ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

right margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

typestyle selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

national character set selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

color selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

super/subscript mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

half-speed printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

condensed print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

enlarged print mode (automatically reset after one line) . 18

✔

ESC J <n>

ESC j <n>

ESC K <n1> <n2>

ESC k <0>

ESC k <1>

ESC k <2>

ESC k <3>

ESC k <4>

ESC k <5>

ESC k <6>

ESC k <7>

ESC k <8>

ESC L <n1> <n2>

^ESCl <n>

ESC M

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

ESC m

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

ESC N <n>

ESC O

ESC P

ESC p <n>

ESC Q <n>

ESC q

ESC R <n>

ESC r <n>

ESC S <n>

ESC s

ESC SI

ESC SO

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

Summary of Possible Codes A-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sequence

Function

Page

ESC SP <n>

ESC T

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

character spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

super/subscript mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

character set selection (italic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

character set selection (graphics) . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

character set selection (download) . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

unidirectional printing ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

continuous enlarged print mode ON/OFF . . . . . . . . 18

double height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

print quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

high speed graphics 120 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

graphics 240 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

select font by pitch and point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

form feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

horizontal tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

line feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

ASCII character 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

condensed print ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

enlarged print mode (automatically reset after one line) . 18

ASCII character 1 (Start Of Heading) . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

vertical tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

ESC t <0>

ESC t <1>

ESC t <2>

ESC U <n>

ESC W <n>

ESC w <n>

ESC x <n>

ESC Y <n1> <n2>

ESC Z <n1> <n2>

ESC X

NUL

SOH

✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

A-6 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sorted by Functions

Function

Sequence

Page

absolute horizontal step

ASCII character 0

assign character table

back feed n/216 inch

bell

character density 10 cpi (Pica)

character density 12 cpi (Elite)

character density 15 cpi

character set selection

character spacing

clear all horizontal tab stops

clear all tab settings

color selection

condensed print

condensed print ON

continuous enlarged print mode ON/OFF

control code BS (Backspace)

control code CAN (Cancel)

control code CR (Carriage Return)

control code DEL (Delete)

control code ESC (Escape)

copy ROM character generator

define download characters (24 needle version)

define draft download characters (9 needle version)

define NLQ download characters (9 needle version)

direct print mode, activate/deactivate

double height

ESC $<n1><n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

NUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

ESC ( t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

ESC j <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

BEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

ESC P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

ESC M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

ESC g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

ESC t <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

ESC SP <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

ESC D NUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

ESC b <m> <0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

ESC r <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

ESC SI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

SI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

ESC W <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

CAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

ESC : <0> <n> <m> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

ESC & <s> <x> <y> <A> ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

ESC & NUL <x> <y> <A> ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

ESC & NUL <x> <y> <d₀> ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

ESC i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

ESC w <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

ESC H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

ESC G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

ESC F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

ESC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

ESC SO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

SO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

ESC k <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

double strike print mode OFF

double strike print mode ON

emphasized mode OFF

emphasized mode ON

enlarged print mode (automatically reset after one line)

font type selection

Summary of Possible Codes A-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Function

Sequence

Page

form feed

FF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

form length in inches

form length in lines

graphics 120 dpi

graphics 144 dpi

graphics 180 dpi

graphics 240 dpi

graphics 360 dpi

graphics 60 dpi

graphics 72 dpi

graphics 80 dpi

graphics 90 dpi

graphics 90 dpin

graphics characters activate/deactivate

half-speed printing

high speed graphics 120 dpi

horizontal and vertical step forward

horizontal and vertical step width

horizontal tab

horizontal tab stops

input data control bit 8 unchanged

input data control bit 8 = 0

input data control bit 8 = 1

italic mode OFF

ESC C NUL <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ESC C <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ESC * <1><n1><n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <33> <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC L <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC Y <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <7><n1><n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <39> <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <3><n1><n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC Z <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <40> <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <0><n1><n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <32> <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC K <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <5><n1><n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <4><n1><n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <6><n1><n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC * <38> <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

ESC s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

ESC * <2> <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ESC f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

ESC e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

HT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

ESC D <n1>...<n32> <0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

ESC # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

ESC = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

ESC > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

ESC 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

ESC 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

ESC a <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

ESC l <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

ESC J <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

ESC A <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

italic mode ON

justification and centering

left margin

line feed

line feed n/216 inch

line feed n72 inch

A-8 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Function

Sequence

Page

national character set selection

paper end sensor, activation

paper end sensor, deactivation

perforation skip

print ASCII codes 128 to 159

print data as characters

print mode selection

print raster graphics

print quality

printer initialization

printout of control codes

proportional spacing ON/OFF

reassign graphics mode

relative horizontal step

reset all vertical tab stops

reset condensed print

ESC R <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

ESC 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

ESC 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

ESC N <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

ESC 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

ESC ( ^ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

ESC !<n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

ESC x <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

ESC @ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

ESC I <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

ESC p <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

ESC ? <s> <m> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

ESC \ <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

ESC B <0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

DC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

DC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

ESC O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

ESC Q <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

ESC ( - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

ESC ^<m> <n1> <n2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

ESC % NUL NUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

ESC X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

ESC ( G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

ESC % <1> NUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

ESC ( V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

ESC c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

ESC 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

ESC 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

ESC 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

ESC 3 <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

reset enlarged print mode (set by <SO> or ESC <SO>)

reset perforation skip

right margin

score selection

select 9 dots graphics mode

select download character generator

select font by pitch and point

select graphics mode

select ROM character generator

set absolute vertical print position

set HMI (horizontal motion index)

set line feed to 1/6 inch

set line feed to 1/8 inch

set line feed to 7/72 inch

set line feed to n/216 inch

set page format

ESC ( c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ESC ( C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

set page length in units

set printer offline

set printer online

DC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

DC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

ESC ( v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

set relative vertical print position

Summary of Possible Codes A-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Function

Sequence

Page

set unit

sheet feeder

Space

super/subscript mode OFF

super/subscript mode ON

suppress ASCII codes 128 to 159

typestyle selection

underline mode ON/OFF

unidirectional printing for one line

unidirectional printing ON/OFF

variable line spacing n/360 inch

vertical tab

vertical tab channel selection

vertical tab stops

vertical tab stops in channels

ESC ( U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

ESC EM <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

ESC T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

ESC S <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

ESC 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

ESC q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

ESC - <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

ESC < . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

ESC U <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

ESC + <n> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

VT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

ESC / <m> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

ESC B <n1>...<n16> <0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

ESC b <m> <n> <0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

A-10 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following character sets can be selected via control panel or by Escape sequences,

which correspond to the selected emulation mode.

The following example shows you how to find the hexadecimal value for a character from

the character set table.

hex

dec

NUL

⁸⁰ASCII "B" ; dec.66 ; hex.42

DC2

B-2 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Standard Character Set

hex

dec

NUL

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

112

128

144

DC1

145

DC2

146

DC3

147

DC4

148

160

176

192

208

224

240

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

129

130

131

132

133

134

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

193

194

195

196

197

298

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

149

150

151

BEL

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

CAN

152

153

154

ESC

155

156

157

158

159

DEL

127

DEL

255

Character Sets B-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

International Substitution Table - normal font

dec

hex

96 123 124 125 126

60 7B 7C 7D 7E

US ASCII

French

German

Danish I

Swedish

Italian

Spanish I

Japanese

Norwegian

Danish II

Spanish II

L.American

B-4 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

International Substitution Table - italic font

dec

hex

163 164 192 219 220 221 222 224 251 252 253 254

A3 A4 C0 DB DC DD DE E0 FB FC FD FE

US ASCII

French

German

Danish I

Swedish

Italian

Spanish I

Japanese

Norwegian

Danish II

Spanish II

L.American

Character Sets B-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphics Character Set

hex

dec

NUL

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

112

128

144

DC1

145

DC2

146

DC3

147

DC4

148

160

176

192

208

224

240

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

129

130

131

132

133

134

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

193

194

195

196

197

298

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

149

150

151

BEL

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

CAN

152

153

154

ESC

155

156

157

158

159

DEL

127

B-6 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Standard Character Set, extended

hex

dec

NUL

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

193

194

195

196

197

298

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

BEL

CAN

ESC

DEL

127

Character Sets B-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphics Character Set, extended

hex

dec

NUL

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

193

194

195

196

197

298

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

BEL

CAN

ESC

DEL

127

B-8 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

International Code Table

hex

dec

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

DC2

DC3

DC4

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

129

130

131

132

133

134

145

DC2

146

DC3

147

DC4

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

193

194

195

196

197

298

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

148

149

150

151

BEL

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

CAN

152

153

154

ESC

155

156

157

158

159

DEL

127

DEL

255

Character Sets B-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

International Code Table, extended

hex

dec

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

DC2

DC3

DC4

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

193

194

195

196

197

298

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

BEL

CAN

ESC

DEL

127

B-10 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Character Width for Proportional Printing

On the following pages you will find tables of character widths for proportional printing.

The characters are represented by the printout, the decimal and the hexadecimal value.

Characters without decimal and hexadecimal codes are international characters or

graphics. Please note the International Substitution Characters on pages B-3 and B-4

and the International Code Tables on page B-8 and B-9. The international characters

can be selected via the sequences ESC R and ESC t (see Description of Sequences).

Please note the following for the different types of printers:

The values of the character widths are units of ¹⁄₁₂₀inch.

For example: The value in the field for character width is 12, that means, the

width of the character is ¹²

⁄₁₂₀inch.

If the field consists of two values separated by a slash (for example 12/5) the

first value stands for the italic character, the second for graphics.

The values of the character widths are units of ¹⁄₃₆₀inch.

For example: The value in the field for character width is 30, that means, the

width of the character is ³⁰

⁄₃₆₀inch.

If the field consists of two values separated by a slash (for example 30/20) the

first value stands for the normal character, the second for the character width

with super- or subscript activated.

The values of the character widths are depending on your selected point size if

using scaleable fonts. In normal print mode values described in

also valid in -mode.

-table are

Character Sets B-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Proportional width during scaleable font mode

The values of the character widths are depending on the selected point size

at your printer.

The width of the scaleable fonts are based on the width of a proportional

10.5 point character.

Calculate the width as follows:

(point size) x (base width)







INT

+ 0.5



10.5

360



(character width) =

inch

Example for a 24 point "0" *)

(24) x (30)







+ 0.5



10.5



(character width) =

inch

360

INT (69.07)

inch

360

inch

360

* The base width for the large character "0" is 30. Please refer to the table

B-12 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

24 Needle Printer

Code

Width

Char.

in ¹⁄

360

hex.

dec.

hex.

dec.

hex.

dec.

30/20

18/12

30/20

36/24

18/12

24/16

30/20

18/12

30/20

18/12

30/20

18/12

30/20

36/24

24/16

30/20

36/24

42/28

36/24

42/28

36/24

42/28

36/24

30/20

24/16

30/20

24/16

30/20

18/12

30/20

36/24

30/20

36/24

30/20

24/16

36/24

18/12

24/16

36/24

18/12

42/28

36/24

30/20

36/24

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

Character Sets B-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code

hex. dec.

Code

Width

Char.

in ¹⁄

360

hex.

dec.

hex.

dec.

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

36/24

30/20

24/16

36/24

42/28

30/20

36/24

30/20

24/26

18/12

24/16

30/20

36/24

30/20

18/12

36/24

42/28

30/20

36/24

42/28

30/20

36/24

42/28

30/20

18/12

30/20

36/24

30/20

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

B-14 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code

Width

Char.

in ¹⁄

360

hex.

dec.

hex.

dec.

hex.

dec.

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

30/20

24/16

30/20

36/24

30/20

Character Sets B-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9 Needle Printer

Width

Code

Character

⁄

120

hex. dec.

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

B-16 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Width

Code

Character

Code

Character

120

Character

⁄

hex. dec.

hex. dec. italic graph.

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

12/12

10/8

10/10

12/11

11/11

12/12

5/12

8/12

12/12

8/12

12/5

7/12

10/12

12/12

9/12

12/12

–

176

177

178

179

180

181

Character Sets B-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Width

Code

Character

Code

Character

Code

Character

120

⁄

hex. dec. italic graph.

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

11/12

12/12

11/12

8/12

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

234

235

236

12/12

11/12

12/12

11/12

7/12

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

9/12

11/12

10/10

11/10

11/12

10/10

11/10

10/12

11/12

10/12

12/12

12/8

9/12

10/12

11/12

9/12

11/12

12/12

10/12

12/12

10/12

12/12

11/12

10/12

12/12

5/12

11/6

126

10/12

9/8

11/11

11/10

11/12

12/10

11/11

12/11

11/12

11/10

9/12

10/8

12/8

12/12

10/12

11/12

B-18 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

our explicit approval.

We reserve the right to make changes to this manual without notice.

All care has been taken to ensure accuracy of information contained in this manual. However, we cannot accept responsibility for any

errors or damages resulting from errors or inaccuracies of information herein.”

TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGES

“EPSON” and “EPSON ESC/P” are registered trademarks and EPSON ESC/P 2 is a trademark of SEIKO EPSON Corporation.

“IBM” is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programmer’s Reference

Tally ANSI (MTPL) Emulation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Description of MTPL-Sequences

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Paper and Text Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Form Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Turn ON Positioning Unit Mode (SM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Turn OFF Positioning Unit Mode (RM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Select Size Unit (SSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Set Top and Bottom Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Clear Top and Bottom Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Set Left and Right Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Clear Left and Right Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Set Line Home (SLH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Set Line Limit (SLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Right Justification ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Centering ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Right Justification and Centering OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Character Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Spacing Increment (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Horizontal Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Horizontal Character Spacing (SHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Character Spacing (SCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Additional Character Spacing (SACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Reduced Character Spacing (SRCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Horizontal Motion Index (HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Horizontal Step (Microspace) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Vertical Spacing (SVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Line Density 6 lpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Line Density 8 lpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Set Line Spacing (SLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Character Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Superscript ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Subscript ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Microscript ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Super-/Sub-/Microscript OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Double Height ON (Upper Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Double Height ON (Lower Half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Double Height OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Select Typestyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Emphasized Mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Emphasized Mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Italic Mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Italic Mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Proportional Mode ON (SGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Proportional Mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Underline Mode ON (SGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Underline Double Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Underline Mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Overline Mode ON (SGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Overline Mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Double Strike ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Double Strike OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Graphic Size Selection (GSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Graphic Size Modification (GSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Font Designation (FNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Print Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Tab Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Set Horizontal Tab Stop at Current Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Horizontal Tab Stops ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Horizontal Tab Stops OFF (TBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Line Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Vertical Tab Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Set Vertical Tab Stop at Current Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Vertical Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Vertical Tab Stops ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Vertical Tab Stops OFF (TBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Horizontal Posititon Absolute (HPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Horizontal Position Relative (HPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Horizontal Position Backward (HPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Vertical Position Absolute (VPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Vertical Position Relative (VPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Vertical Position Backward (VPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Horizontal and Vertical Position Absolute (HVP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Backspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Carriage Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Form Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Partial Line Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Partial Line Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Reverse Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Next Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Graphic Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Load Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Automatic Gap Adjustment (AGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Direct Setting of the Print Head Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Shared Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Color Selection (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Input Data Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Sheet Feeder/Paperway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Eject Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Reset to Initial State (RIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Command Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Activation of Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Designation of Character Set G0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Designation of Character Set G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Designation of Character Set G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Designation of Character Set G3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Activation of Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Size of Character Set (1 Character Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Size of Character Set (2 Character Sets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Proportional Spacing (Draft) OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Proportional Spacing (Draft) ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Font Selection for NLQ/LQ only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Font Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Print Code Area Expansion ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Print Code Area Expansion OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Print Transparent Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Printer Identification (DA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Device Status Report (DSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Enquiry for Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Fill Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Start of Text Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

End of Text Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Positive Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Negative Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Clear Print Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Acoustic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Start Character “Escape” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

MTPL-Start Character “Control Sequence Introducer” . . . . . . . . . . 98

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A Summary of Possible Codes

Sorted by Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Sorted by Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

Appendix B Character Sets

Standard Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

International Substitution Table – normal font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Appendix C Additional Technical Description

Index

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Description of MTPL-Sequences

Introduction

Paper and Text Formatting

Character Spacing

Line Spacing

Character Styling

Print Positioning

Graphics

Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Regardless of the specific MTPL sequences of your printer, this User’s Manual describes

the sum of all MTPL sequences and control codes. The only differentiation is made be-

tween 9 and 24 needle printers as well as the maximum possible paper width of 8 inches

(80 column printer) or 13.6 inches (132 column printer). Please note that the print quality

LQ (Letter Quality) is only available in the 24 needle printer.

Please be sure to observe the notes and steps described in the Operator’s Manual as

well as the specific MTPL sequences implemented in your printer and which of the

described sequences are thus not available.

Select the MTPL sequence as described in the Operator’s Manual, chapter 2.

Apart from the command language MTPL your printer also understands other printer emu-

lation sequences and commands. MTPL and an additional emulation can be active at the

same time. For this refer to the chapter 2, “Emulations”, Operator’s Manual.

The following explanations will help you

understand the sequences better:

Every sequence description begins with a header, in which the function and the short

form of the sequence are listed without parameters, e.g.:

Set Form Lenght in Lines

CSI ... t

With the CSI (hex.9B, dec.155) control code the most MTPL sequences are introduced.

*) MTPL: “Tally Printer Language”

2 Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CSI means “Control Sequence Introducer” and is described by the code 9B (hex.) or ESC [ :

7-Bit-environment ➛ hex. 1B, hex. 5B (= ESC [ )

8-Bit-environment ➛ hex. 9B

It is sensible to use only ESC [ as “Control Sequence Introducer” if MTPL is used

associated with any other printer emulation.

STOP

The last character (in the following example t) specifies the function of the sequence.

The header is followed by the Data Structure in ASCII, hexadecimal und decimal syntax

with the necessary parameters, e.g.:

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"t"

116

[A] set form lenght in lines

For the parameter (here n) it is necessary to differentiate between two types of syntax:

if the parameter is in pointed parentheses, the decimal value is transferred

if the parameter is not in pointed parentheses, the ASCII value is transferred

Example:

Parameter syntax:

to be transmitted:

<n>, with n=0

dec.0 (hex.00)

Parameter syntax:

to be transmitted:

n, with n=0

ASCII "0" (hex.30, dec.48)

Each sequence description or a number of the available parameters is additionally speci-

fied with a code level from A to C in square brackets (e.g. “[A]”).

This three code levels are defined as follows:

[A]

[B]

[C]

This code level is to be used for creating new printer driver versions.

This is an optional extension of the MTPL standard.

This function is to be used to ensure compatibility tp previous products. When

creating new printer driver versions this code level should not be used anymore.

Introduction 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character explanation and symbol description

Lower case “ ”

Informations

Sequence only applies for 9 needle printer

Sequence only applies for 24 needle printer

In the following you will find an example for a MTPL sequence with a Basic programming

example:

Set to a form length of 72 lines:

MTPL-Sequence

Transmission

CSI

with n=72

"72"

37 32

55 50

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI

155

"t"

116

100 REM Sample for the CSI n t sequence in ASCII,

110 REM using formulars with 72 lines.

120 REM Please note, in ASCII-Syntax you can use ASCII values

130 REM equal or bigger codetable no. 32 only.

140 LPRINT CHR$(155);"72";"t": REM mixed syntax;

150 REM set form length up to 72 lines

160 REM The same sequence written in hexadecimal syntax

170 LPRINT CHR$(&H9B);CHR$(&H37);CHR$(&H32);CHR$(&H74);

180 REM set form length up to 12 lines

190 REM The same sequence written in decimal syntax

200 LPRINT CHR$(155);CHR$(55);CHR$(50);CHR$(116);

210 REM set form length up to 72 lines

4 Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper and Text Formatting

Form Length

CSI ... t

Data Sructure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"t"

116

[A] set form lenght in lines

PUM turned OFF:

n = 1...132 lines at a line spacing of ⁄₆inch (6 lpi)

= 1...176 lines at a line spacing of ⁄₈inch (8 lpi)

This MTPL-sequence sets the form length to n times the current line feed pitch (in in-

ches). Also the current print position is simultaneously defined as top of form.

The value specified for n must be in the range 1 to 255. This value is multiplied by the cur-

rent line feed pitch to obtain the form length. For example, if 60 is specified for n and the

current line feed is ⁄₆inch, the form length is set to 10 inches. Once set by this sequence,

the form length is not affected by changing the line spacing.

PUM turned ON:

The unit for n is either the decipoint or defined by the SSU function (Select Size Unit, see

page 8).

n = 0: Reset form lenght to default value.

(print menu setting)

Paper and Text Formatting 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

form length

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4t";

30 FOR F=1 TO 2

40 FOR L=1 TO 3

50 LPRINT "length 4:form";F;" line";L

60 NEXT L:LPRINT CHR$(12);:NEXT F

70 LPRINT

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";

90 FOR F=1 TO 3

100 FOR L=1 TO 2

110 LPRINT "length 3:form";F;" line";L

120 NEXT L:LPRINT CHR$(12);:NEXT F

130 END

6 Paper and Text Formatting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Turn ON Positioning Unit Mode (SM)

Turn OFF Positioning Unit Mode (RM)

CSI 11 h

CSI 11

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "1" "1" "h"

9B 31 31 68

155 49 49 104

[A] turn PUM ON

[A] turn PUM OFF

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "1" "1" " "

9B 31 31 69

155 49 49 105

Description

PUM = Positioning Unit Mode

This mode decides, wether positioning commands or functions that deal with horizontal

or vertical position parameters, have characters and line positions as parameters or

some fixed units defined by the SSU control function (Select Size Unit, see the following

sequence).

If PUM is turned on and no unit is defined, the units shall default to decipoints ( ⁄₇₂₀of an

inch).

If PUM is turned off, the units shall default to line or character distances.

By default the PUM mode is turned off. If PUM ist activated the accuracy cannot exceed

the vertical or horizontal resolution of your printer.

Paper and Text Formatting 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select Size Unit (SSU)

CSI ... SP I

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP "I"

SP 49

SP 73

[B] select size unit

Description

For n the following parameters are available:

hex. dec.

size unit

Decipoints ( ⁄₇₂₀inch = 0,0353 mm)

Millimeters

Decipoints (0,0353 mm)

Decididots (0,0376 mm)

Mils ( ⁄₁₀₀₀inch = 0,0254 mm)

Basic Measuring Unit BMU ( ⁄₁₂₀₀inch = 0,02117 mm)

Micrometer (0,001 mm)

Pixels

➊

➊ This unit is machine dependent and may be of different size horizontally and vertically.

Page printers support typically 200, 300 or 600 dpi, matrix printers e.g. 180 or 360 dpi.

Example:

CSI

1B 55

720

37 32 30

results in one inch

By default the size unit is the decipoint. Other size units may not be available due used

printer type.

PUM must be set to ON (see page 7)

8 Paper and Text Formatting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Top and Bottom Margin

Clear Top and Bottom Margin

CSI ... r

CSI r

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

";"

"r"

114

[A] set top and bottom margin

155 n

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "r"

9B 72

155 114

[A] clear top and bottom margin

Description

n specifies the value of the top margin

n specifies the value of the bottom margin

n , n

1...132 lines at a line spacing of ⁄₆inch (6 lpi)

1...176 lines at a line spacing of ⁄₈inch (8 lpi)

Examples:

CSI n r

CSI ; 0 r

set top margin, set bottom margin to default

clear top and bottom margin

CSI ; n r

clear top margin, set bottom margin

Any change of margin settings is only effective from the next page on.

The setting of the top and bottom margins depends on the line spacing which is defined

before setting the margins. If line spacing is set after the setting of the top and bottom

margins, the margin positions on this page are not influenced.

If the form length is changed, the top margin is set to the first line, the bottom margin is

set to the last line (= form length).

If there are any logical problems (for example, the setting of top margin is larger then the

page length), the sequence is ignored. If only one margin is changed the other margin

is automatically reset to the default value.

The unit depends on PUM and is either character positions or defined by the SSU func-

tion (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Paper and Text Formatting 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

top and bottom margin

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[6t";:REM form length

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[2;5r":REM set margins

40 FOR F=1 TO 2

50 FOR L=2 TO 5

60 LPRINT "form";F;" line ";L

70 NEXT L:NEXT F

80 LPRINT

90 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0;0r";:REM clear margins

100 FOR F=1 TO 2

110 FOR L=1 TO 6

120 LPRINT "form";F;" line ";L

130 NEXT L:NEXT F

140 END

10 Paper and Text Formatting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Left and Right Margin

Clear Left and Right Margin

CSI ... s

CSI s

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

";"

"s"

115

[A] set left and right margin

[A] clear left and right margin

155 n

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "s"

9B 73

155 115

Description

specifies the value of the left margin

specifies the value of the right margin

Print width 8 inches

Print width 13,6 inches

n , n

1... 80 at 10 cpi

1... 96 at 12 cpi

1...120 at 15 cpi

1...136 at 17.1 cpi

1...160 at 20 cpi

1...136 at 10 cpi

1...163 at 12 cpi

1...204 at 15 cpi

1...232 at 17.1 cpi

1...272 at 20 cpi

Values for n , n are valid for a line length of 8 inches (80 column printer) or 13.6 inches

(136 column printer) set in the printer menu.

Example:

CSI n s

CSI s

set left margin, set right margin to default

clear left and right margin

CSI ; n s

clear left margin, set right margin

The setting of the left and right margins depends on the current character density.

Any later setting of the character density will not influence the positions of the left and

right margins on this page.

The unit depends on PUM and is either character positions or defined by the SSU func-

tion (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Paper and Text Formatting 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If only one margin is changed, the other margin will be reset to default value.

If there are any logical problems (for example, left margin > right margin), the sequence

is ignored.

Example

10 REM

left and right margin

20 WIDTH "LPT1:",255

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[10;53s";

40 LPRINT "Now the left margin is set to column 10 and the ";

50 LPRINT "right margin is set to column 53."

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[5;41s";

70 LPRINT "Now the left margin has been reduced to column 5 ";

80 LPRINT "and the right margin has been set to column 41."

90 END

12 Paper and Text Formatting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Line Home (SLH)

Set Line Limit (SLL)

CSI ... SP U

CSI ... SP V

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP "U"

20 55

32 85

[A] set line home

[A] set line limit

➊

➋

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

SP "V"

20 55

32 85

155 n

Description

n = 1...maximal print area

➊ Default setting: Physical left margin of medium or device.

n specifies the left margin. The first position is 1. The unit depends on PUM (Positioning

Unit Mode) and is either characters or defined by SSU (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Example:

CSI SP U

CSI 10 SP U

reset to physical left margin

set left margin to position 10

➋ Default setting: Physical right margin (=1) of medium or device.

n specifies the right margin.

The unit depends on PUM (Positioning Unit Mode) and is either character positions or

defined by SSU (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Example:

CSI SP V

CSI 80 SP V

reset to physical right margin

set right margin to position 80

Paper and Text Formatting 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Right Justification ON

CSI 8 y

CSI 9 y

CSI 10 y

CSI : y

Centering ON

Right Justification and Centering OFF

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"y"

121

justification

Description

For n the following characters are available:

hex.

dec.

justification

31 30

49 48

[A] right justification ON

[A] centering ON

[A] right justification and centering OFF

[C] right justification and centering OFF

➊

➋

➊ Leading blanks will not be corrected. Blanks at line end will be ignored.

➋ The text is centered between the active margins.

14 Paper and Text Formatting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Spacing

Spacing Increment (SPI)

CSI ... SP G

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

";"

SP "G"

20 47

32 71

[B] [C] set spacing increment

155I n

specifies the line spacing

specifies the character spacing

The unit is expressed in decipoints or other units defined by SSU (Select Size Unit, see

page 8).

For this note also the sequence “Set Line Spacing (SLS)” on page 26.

Example:

∧

CSI 120 ; 0 G

CSI 90 ; 60 G

6 lpi, basic cpi

8 lpi, 12 cpi

∧

The default setting of the spacing increment normally is 10 cpi.

n = 0: The distance is reset to the values set in the printer menu.

Character Spacing 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Spacing

CSI ... w

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"w"

119

[A] set cpi

Description

For n the following parameters are available:

hex.

dec.

horizontal spacing

5 cpi

6 cpi

7,5 cpi

[B] [C] 8,6 cpi

10 cpi

12 cpi

15 cpi

31 31

31 32

49 49

49 50

[B] [C] 17,1 cpi

[B] [C] 20 cpi

[C]

10* cpi

10* cpi in this sequence means higher horizontal resolution of the printed characters

(emphasized printing), but lower print speed.

Various character densities can also be used within one line.

The default value for the character density is the printer menu setting.

16 Character Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

character densities

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4wthis is 10 cpi, ";

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[12wthis is 10 cpi (high resolution), "

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[5wthis is 12 cpi, ";

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[6wthis is 15 cpi, ";

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[7wthis is 17.1 cpi, ";

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[11wthis is 20 cpi, "

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0wthis is 5 cpi, ";

90 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[1wthis is 6 cpi, "

100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[2wthis is 7.5 cpi, ";

110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3wand 8.6 cpi"

120 END

Character Spacing 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Character Spacing (SHS)

CSI ... SP K

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP "K"

20 4B

32 75

[A] set cpi

Description

For n the following parameters are available:

hex. dec.

character spacing

10 cpi

6 cpi

12 cpi

15 cpi

With this sequence the horizontal character spacing is defined.

The change of the character dimensions is implementation dependent.

18 Character Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Spacing (SCS)

CSI ... SP g

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP "g"

20 67

32 103

[A] set character spacing

Description

specifies the character spacing

The unit is either decipoints or depends on the SSU selection (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

The character size will not be changed.

Character Spacing 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Additional Character Spacing (SACS)

CSI ... SP \

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP " \"

20 5C

32 92

[A] set additional character spacing

Description

specifies the additional character spacing

The units are either decipoints or defined by SSU (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

This function enlarges the inter character spacing. The function will typically be used with

proportional spacing to get effects like “spaced out” or right justification.

With fixed spacing, functions like SCS (Set Character Spacing, see previous page 19)

should be used.

The character size will not be changed.

20 Character Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reduced Character Spacing (SRCS)

CSI ... SP f

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP "f"

20 66

32 102

[B] set reduced character spacing

Description

specifies the reduced character spacing

The units are either decipoints or defined by SSU (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

This function reduces the inter character spacing. The function will typically be used with

proportional spacing to get special effects like e.g. kerning.

With fixed spacing, functions like SCS (Set Character pacing, see page 19) should be

used.

The character size will not be changed.

Character Spacing 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Motion Index (HMI)

CSI ... p

Data Sructure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI

155

"p"

112

[C] set HMI

Description

n = 0...20

The normal character density is enlarged by n ∗ ⁄

HMI is disabled.

inch. If n is set to zero (default setting),

120

Example

10 REM

horizontal motion index

20 LPRINT "this is normal width"

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3p";

40 LPRINT "now 3/120 inch is added to normal width"

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[6p";

60 LPRINT "now 6/120 inch is added to normal width"

70 END

22 Character Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Step (Microspace)

CSI ... q

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"q"

113

[C] set horizontal step

n = 1...255

The space between characters is enlarged by n ∗ ⁄

inch at the current print position.

inch

120

Examples:

CSI q

CSI 10 q

enlarging character space by n ∗ ⁄

120

⁄

inserts a

inch space

Example

10 REM

horizontal step

20 LPRINT "in the word ‘hori";

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[20q";

40 LPRINT "zontal‘ there is a step of 20/120 inch"

50 END

Character Spacing 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Spacing

Vertical Spacing (SVS)

CSI ... SP L

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP "L"

20 4C

32 76

[A] set vertical spacing (lpi)

For n the following parameters are available:

hex. dec.

vertical spacing

6 lpi

4 lpi

3 lpi

12 lpi

8 lpi

2 lpi

Note that changing the line spacing also changes the number of lines per page.

Changing of line spacing does not affect the form length set before hand.

24 Line Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Density 6 lpi

Line Density 8 lpi

CSI 3 z

CSI 4 z

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "3" "z"

9B 33 7A

155 51 122

[C] line density 6 lpi (= line spacing 1/6 inch)

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "4" "z"

9B 34 7A

155 52 122

[C] line density 8 lpi (= line spacing 1/8 inch)

Description

Example

These sequences set the line spacing to ⁄₆inch (6 lpi line density) or ⁄₈inch (8 lpi line

density).

Note that changing the line spacing also changes the number of lines per page.

Changing of line spacing does not affect the current vertical tab stops or form length.

10 REM

line spacing

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4z";

30 LPRINT "these two lines are printed with"

40 LPRINT "a spacing of 1/8 inch"

50 LPRINT

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3z";

70 LPRINT "these two lines are printed with"

80 LPRINT "a spacing of 1/6 inch"

90 END

Line Spacing 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Line Spacing (SLS)

CSI ... SP h

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP "h"

20 68

32 104

[A] set line spacing

Description

specifies the line spacing

The unit is either decipoints or depends on the SSU selection (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Note also the sequence SPI (Spacing Increment, see page 15).

26 Line Spacing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Styling

Superscript ON

CSI 0 z

CSI 1 z

CSI 10 z

CSI 2 z

Subscript ON

Microscript ON

Super-/Sub-/Microscript OFF

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"z"

122

[A] character styling

For n the following parameters are availble:

hex.

dec.

character styling

31 30

49 48

superscript ON

subscript ON

super-/sub-/microscript OFF ➋

microscript ON

➊

➊ These sequences switch the printer to superscript, subscript or microscript mode. The

subsequent characters are printed with about ⁄₂of their normal height. If superscript

or subscript characters are underlined, the underline character is printed at its normal

position.

➋ This sequence resets the printer to normal mode.

The base line for microprint is the same as for normal print.

The sequence CSI 2 z also resets double height.

(For this see also the following page 29, Double Height OFF)

Character Styling 27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

super/sub/microscript

20 LPRINT "E=M*C";

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0z";

40 LPRINT "2";

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[2z";

60 LPRINT " is Einsteins most famous formula."

70 LPRINT "H";

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[1z";"2";CHR$(27);"[2z";

90 LPRINT "O is simply water."

100 LPRINT "Micro";CHR$(27);"[10zscript";CHR$(27);"[2z";

110 LPRINT "is printed in the base line"

120 END

28 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Double Height ON (Upper Half)

Double Height ON (Lower Half)

Double Height OFF

CSI 12 z

CSI 13 z

CSI 2 z

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "1" "2" "z"

9B 31 32 7A

155 49 50 122

[C] double height ON (upper half)

[C] double height ON (lower half)

[A] double height OFF

➊

➋

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "1" "3" "z"

9B 31 33 7A

155 49 51 122

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "2" "z"

9B 32 7A

155 50 122

Description

➊ The same character must be sent to both lines to form a full character. Afterwards

double height must be reset. If only a part of the line is printed double height, the posi-

tioning of upper/lower half must be done by spaces. The line spacing should be set to

⁄₆inch.

➋ This sequence also resets superscript, subscript and microscript.

Note: For selection of double height together with the proportional mode or other print

attributes the start of printing has to be identic for the top and bottom half.

Character Styling 29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM double height

20 LPRINT "For ";CHR$(27);"[12zHeadlines ";CHR$(27);"[2z";

30 LPRINT "printing in double"

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[13z

50 LPRINT "height is recommended"

60 END

Headlines";CHR$(27);"[2z"

30 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Quality

CSI ... SP X

CSI ... y

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP "X"

20 58

32 88

[A] select print quality

select print quality

➊

ASCII

hex.

CSI n

"y"

➋

dec.

155 n

121

Description

➊ This sequence defines the print quality. Print throughput changes with the print quality.

For n the following parameters are available:

(printer menu setting is valid)

hex. dec.

print quality

[A] [B] high

[A]

medium

low

➋ With the sequence CSI n y for n the following parameters are available:

hex.

dec.

typeface

[A] draft print quality (DPQ)

[A] near letter quality (NLQ)

[C] NLQ at 10 cpi

[C] NLQ at 12 cpi

31 31

31 32

31 33

49 49

49 50

49 51

[B] fast draft print quality

[A] letter print quality (LQ) - e.g. 24∗36 matrix

[B] high resolution print quality - e.g. 24∗48 matrix

Character Styling 31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

print quality

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0yThis is draft quality ";

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[1yand this is NLQ printing."

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[5yThis is NLQ with 12 cpi."

50 END

32 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select Typestyle

CSI ... m

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"m"

109

[A] select typestyle

Description

This sequence defines the typestyle.

For n the following parameters are available:

hex.

dec.

typestyle (number is printer dependent)

31 30

31 31

31 32

31 33

31 34

31 35

31 36

31 37

31 38

31 39

49 48

49 49

49 50

49 51

49 52

49 53

49 54

49 55

49 56

49 57

font 0

font 1

font 2

font 3

font 4

font 5

font 6

font 7

font 8

font 9

clear all selected fonts

Depending on the value specified for n, one of the internal printer fonts or a font of an

optional font card is selected. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for information on printer-

resident fonts and font cards which can be installed.

The order of the font 0 to font 9 not corresponds to the fonts displayed on your printer.

The sequence and allocation is defined by the sequence CSI n ; n SP D (see FNT,

Font Selection, page 43).

A maximum of 16 CSI...m -sequences can be joined in one sequence: e.g. as follows:

CSI n ; n ; n m.

Character Styling 33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

Valid for most MTPL printers.

Fontregister

Font

Draft

NLQ Courier

LQ Courier

NLQ Sans Serif

LQ Sans Serif

LQ Roman

LQ Script

LQ Prestige

LQ OCR-B

LQ OCR-A

34 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Emphasized Mode ON

Emphasized Mode OFF

CSI = z

CSI > z

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "=" "z"

9B 3D 7A

155 61 122

[C] emphasized mode ON

[C] emphasized mode OFF

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI ">" "z"

9B 3E 7A

155 62 122

Description

Example

During printing in emphasized mode, each dot is printed twice, slightly shifted in horizon-

tal direction.

Emphasized mode can be used in all print qualities and character densities.

10 REM

emphasized mode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[z";"this is printed in the normal mode"

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[=z";"and this inthe emphasized one"

40 END

Character Styling 35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Italic Mode ON

Italic Mode OFF

CSI 3 m

CSI 23 m

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "3" "m"

9B 33 6D

155 51 109

[A] italic mode ON

[A] italic mode OFF

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "2" "3" "m"

9B 32 33 6D

155 50 51 109

The sequence CSI 0 m resets all CSI...m-sequences!

A maximum of 16 CSI...m -sequences can be joined in one sequence, e.g. as follows:

CSI n ;n ;n m

Example

10 REM italic mode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3m"

30 GOSUB 70

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[23m"

50 GOSUB 70

60 END

70 LPRINT "Matrix Printer"

80 RETURN

36 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Proportional Mode ON (SGR)

Proportional Mode OFF

CSI 26 m

CSI 2 y

CSI 50 m

CSI 7 y

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "2" "6" "m"

9B 32 36 6D

155 50 54 109

[A] proportional mode ON

[C] proportional mode ON

[A] proportional mode OFF

[C] proportional mode OFF

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "2" "y"

9B 32 79

155 50 121

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "5" "0" "m"

9B 35 30 6D

155 53 48 109

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "7" "y"

9B 37 79

155 55 121

Description

When in default font type, all characters are assigned a fixed, equally wide space.

When in proportional mode, the spaces between each character are set to the actual

width of the characters; on account of these “proportional spaces” reading of the text

becomes more easy.

Various font types basically are printed in proportional mode, e.g. Script, Kaufmann etc.

The sequence CSI 0 m resets all CSI...m-sequences!

A maximum of 16 CSI...m -sequences can be joined in one sequence, e.g. as follows:

CSI n ;n ;n m

Character Styling 37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

proportional spacing

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[2y";

30 LPRINT "this is an example with proportional spacing"

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[7y";

50 LPRINT "this is an example with normal spacing"

60 END

38 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Underline Mode ON (SGR)

Underline Double Mode

Underline Mode OFF

CSI 4 m

CSI 21 m

CSI 24 m

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "4" "m"

9B 34 6D

155 52 109

[A] underline mode ON

[A] underline double mode

[A] underline mode OFF

➊

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "2" "1" "m"

9B 32 31 6D

155 50 49 109

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "2" "4" "m"

9B 32 34 6D

155 50 52 109

Description

➊ All printed characters including spaces are automatically unerlined. Spaces between

tab codes (HT) are underlined.

The sequence CSI 0 m resets all CSI...m-sequences!

A maximum of 16 CSI...m -sequences can be joined in one sequence, e.g. as follows:

CSI n ;n ;n m

Example

10 REM

underline mode

20 LPRINT "the most ";

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4m";

40 LPRINT "important";

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[24m";

60 LPRINT " word must be underlined."

70 END

Character Styling 39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Overline Mode ON (SGR)

Overline Mode OFF

CSI 53 m

CSI 55 m

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "5" "3" "m"

9B 35 33 6D

155 53 51 109

[A] overline mode ON

[A] overline mode OFF

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "5" "5" "m"

9B 35 35 6D

155 53 53 109

Description

This sequence switches the automatic overline function on or off. When the automatic

overline function is on, all printed characters including spaces are automatically under-

lined (also see SGR, Underline Mode ON, previous page 39).

The sequence CSI 0 m resets all CSI...m-sequences!

A maximum of 16 CSI...m -sequences can be joined in one sequence, e.g. as follows:

CSI n ;n ;n m

40 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Double Strike ON

Double Strike OFF

CSI 9 w

CSI 8 w

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "9" "w"

9B 39 77

155 57 119

[B] [C] double strike print mode ON

[B] [C] double strike print mode OFF

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "8" "w"

9B 38 77

155 56 119

Description

In double strike mode characters are printed twice in two printing passes. Double strike

mode can be used in all print qualities and character densities. Double strike mode can

also be used in combination with emphasized mode.

The use of this sequence in combination with LQ and emphasized printing is not

recommended.

STOP

Example

10 REM double strike

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[8w";

30 LPRINT "this is normal printing";

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[9w";

50 LPRINT "and this is double strike printing"

60 END

Character Styling 41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphic Size Selection (GSS)

CSI ... SP C

CSI ... SP B

Graphic Size Modification (GSM)

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP "C"

20 43

32 67

[B] graphic size selection

➊

➋

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

;

SP "B"

20 42

32 66

[A] graphic size modification

155 n

Description

➊ n specifies the hight of the used font

The units are either decipoints or defined by the SSU function (Select Size Unit,

see page 8).

The width is implicitly defined by the height.

Example:

CSI 120 SP C

set 12 point font (= 120 decipoints)

➋ n specifies the height of the used fonts (default setting: 100)

specifies its width

(default setting: 100)

These parameters are given as a percent value of the size establishment by sequence ➊.

Example:

CSI SP B

standard height and width

CSI 50 ; 50 SP B

CSI 200 ; 200 SP B

CSI 100 ; 67 SP B

half sized characters (e.g. for indices or exponents)

double sized characters (e.g. for headlines)

compresses a 10 pitch font for 15 cpi

If the selected character size is not printable, the next available character size is used.

42 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Font Designation (FNT)

CSI ... SP D

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

SP "D"

20 44

32 68

[A] designate font

;

155 n

Description

n = font number 0...9

n = identification (ID) of the desired font

For n the following parameters are available:

hex.

dec.

identification

Roman

Sans Serif

Courier

Prestige

Script

OCR B

OCR A

Modern

Kaufmann

Gothic

31 30

31 31

36 36

49 48

49 49

54 54

Swiss

Quadrato

Courier IBM

The first parameter (n ) selects one of ten font registers to which the second parameter (n )

designates one font of the whole repertory in the device. With the sequence CSI 1...m the

designated font can be selected (see page 33, Select Typestyle).

n is in the range of zero to nine and selects primary font, first alternate font etc. up to the

nineth alternate font.

The second parameter (n ) is defined by your printer type and represents an identification

of the desired font.

Character Styling 43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Font attributes, e.g. “bold” can be specified after designation through corresponding ESC

sequences.

Technical Details The use of the font designation code CSIn ;n space D needs further explanation. (Note:

Font Designation CSI is 9B; you can use ESC[, 1B 5BH, instead if you wish.)

Codes

The parameter n Register to use.

This paramer can take values of 0 to 9. The default allocation of fonts to these registers is

given in the printer’s manual.

The parameter n What to put in the register.

This parameter is held as a 16 bit number in the printer. It is made up as below:

The lower eight bits (0 to 255)

These encode the typeface and are as given in the manual with the exception that 5 is

OCR-B and 6 is OCR-A.

0 = Roman

5 = OCR-B

9 = Gothic

1 = Sans Serif

6 = OCR-A

10 = Helvette

2 = Courier

7 = Modern

11 = Quadrato

4 = Script

8 = Kaufmann

66 = Courier IBM

The upper eight bits

Only bits 9 (512H) and 11 (2048H) are used. All the other bits must be left at 0. Bits 9 and

11 set print quality:

Bit 11

Bit 9

Letter Quality

Draft

Near Letter Quality

Reserved

When Draft (01) is selected the lower eight bits have a new meaning:

0 = Multicopy Draft 1 = Fast Draft 2 = Normal Draft

to specify a type face with a print quality add the decimal values and convert to an ASCII

string.

Example 1:

Example 2:

Example 3:

Courier LQ = 00 + 2

Script NLQ = 10 (2048) + 4

Number = 2

Number = 2052

Number = 513

Draft

= 01 (512) + 1

So CSI7;513 D i.e.: 9B 37 3B 35 31 33 20 44H (or ESC[7;513 D i.e. 1B 5B 37 3B 35 31

33 20 44 H) will put Fast Draft in font register 7. The sequence ESC[17m will select this

44 Character Styling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Positioning

Horizontal Tab Stop

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

[A] horizontal tab stop

The HT-Code moves the active print position to the next horizontal tabulation stop on the

same line. If there is no tab stop reachable - no more tab stops are set or the next tab

stop is beyond the defined right margin - spaces are inserted.

The graphic renditions, e.g. underlining, overscoring etc., being active during the tab is ex-

ecuted, apply also to the whitespace produced by two tab stops.

Set Horizontal Tab Stop at Current Position

HTS

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

HTS

136

[A] set horizontal tab stop

This code sets a tab stop at the current horizontal position.

Print Positioning 45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Tab Stops ON

CSI ... u

ESC H

Horizontal Tab Stops OFF (TBC)

CSI ... g

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

"u"

117

[A] set horizontal tab stop

➊

155 n

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "H"

1B 48

27 72

[C] set horizontal tab stop at current position

[A] clear all horizontal tab stops

➋

➌

ASCII

hex.

CSI n

"g"

dec.

155 n

103

Description

➊

Print width 8 inches

Print width 13,6 inches

1... 80 at 10 cpi

1... 96 at 12 cpi

1...120 at 15 cpi

1...136 at 17.1 cpi

1...160 at 20 cpi

1...136 at 10 cpi

1...163 at 12 cpi

1...204 at 15 cpi

1...232 at 17.1 cpi

1...272 at 20 cpi

Values for n are valid for a line length of 8 inches (80-column printer) or 13.6 inches

(136-column printer) set in the menu.

Up to 16 tab stops can be joined in one sequence as follows:

CSI n ; n ; n ; ... ; n

The parameters do not have to be sorted. The positions of the horizontal tab stops depend

on the current character density.

∧

➋ This sequence is interpreted as a Epson/IBM-sequence (ESC H = LQ off), if the emula-

tion MTPL Epson/IBM is set.

46 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

➌ With the sequence CSI n g for n the following parameters are available:

hex. dec.

function

clear horizontal tab stop at current position

clear all horizontal tab stops in current line

clear all horizontal tab stops in all lines

Examples:

CSI g

CSI 3;4 g

clear horizontal tab stop at current position

clear all horizontal and vertical tab stops

(for this also see page 52, Vertical Tab Stops ON/OFF)

Later changes of character density will not influence the physical position of the tab

stops.

A horizontal tabulation is executed by the HT control code (hex.09, dec.9); for this see

page 45, Horizontal Tab Stop.

Print Positioning 47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 1

10 REM

horizontal tabs

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4w";:REM 10 cpi

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[10;20;30u";

40 LPRINT "123456789012345678901234567890123456789"

50 GOSUB 110

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0w";:REM 5 cpi

70 GOSUB 110

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[11w";:REM 20 cpi

90 GOSUB 110

100 END

110 LPRINT CHR$(9);"tab1";

120 LPRINT CHR$(9);"tab2";

130 LPRINT CHR$(9);"tab3"

140 RETURN

Example 2

10 FOR I=1 TO 3

20 LPRINT "1234567890";CHR$(27);"H";

30 NEXT I

40 LPRINT

50 FOR J=1 TO 3

60 LPRINT CHR$(9);"tab";

70 NEXT J

80 LPRINT

90 END

48 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Feed

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

[A] line feed

Description

When the printer receives this code, it prints all the data in the print buffer, then advances

the paper one line.

The LF code can also give a carriage return if automatic carriage return is selected. If no

CR is given, the next printing starts in the column following the end of printing.

The amount by which the paper is advanced depends on the current line spacing. The

default line spacing of the printer is ⁄₆inch.

Print Positioning 49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Tab Stop

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

vertical tab stop

Description

When the printer receives this code, it prints all the data in the print buffer, then advances

the paper to the next vertical tab stop position.

The VT code can also give a carriage return if automatic carriage return is selected (refer

to Operator’s Manual). If no CR is given, the next printing starts in the column following

the end of printing.

The amount by which the paper is advanced depends on the current line spacing. After

switching on the printer no vertical tab stops are set (default configuration). If there are no

vertical tab stops between the current print position and the end of the page, or if there

are no vertical tab stops set, VT assumes the same function as LF.

50 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Set Vertical Tab Stop at Current Position

VTS

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

VTS

[A] set vertical tab stop

dec.

138

Description

This code sets an horizontal tab stop at the current vertical position.

Vertical Index

IND

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

IND

[A] vertical index

dec.

132

Description

The code IND moves the active print position to the following line. The difference to Line

Feed (LF) is that IND does not permit an CR option.

Print Positioning 51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Tab Stops ON

CSI ... v

CSI 1 g

CSI 4 g

Vertical Tab Stops OFF (TBC)

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"v"

118

[A] set vertical tab stop

➊

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "1" "g"

9B 31 67

155 49 103

[A] clear all vertical tab stops at current position

[A] clear all vertical tab stops

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "4" "g"

9B 34 67

155 52 103

Description

➊

n = 1...132 lines at a line spacing of ⁄₆inch (6 lpi)

= 1...176 lines at a line spacing of ⁄₈inch (8 lpi)

Up to 16 tab stops can be joined in one sequence as follows:

CSI n ; n ; n ; ... ; n

The parameters do not have to be sorted. The positions of the horizontal tab stops

depend on the current character density.

Examples:

CSI g

CSI 3;4 g

clear horizontal tab stop at current position

clear all horizontal and vertical tab stops

(for this also see page 46, Horizontal Tab Stops ON/OFF)

Later changes of character density will not influence the physical position of the tab stops.

52 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A vertical tabulation is executed by the VT control code (hex.0B, dec.11); also see page 50,

Vertical Tab Stop.

Example

10 REM

vertical tabs

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[10t";:REM set form length

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4g";:REM clear all vtabs

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3;5;9v";

50 LPRINT CHR$(11);"this is the first vertical tab, line 3"

60 LPRINT CHR$(11);"this is the second vertical tab, line 5"

70 LPRINT CHR$(11);"this is the third vertical tab, line 9"

80 END

Print Positioning 53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Posititon Absolute (HPA)

CSI ... ’

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

" ‘ "

[A] set horizontal position absolute

∧

Description

n = 1 (default setting) = current left margin

This sequence moves the print head to a horizontal print position absolute.

The unit depends on PUM (Positioning Unit Mode) and is either character positions or

defined by the SSU-function (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Example:

CSI 40 ‘

CSI ‘

next character goes to position 40

next character goes to the left margin

Positions outside the right margin are ignored.

Make sure you do not confuse the character “ ‘ ” with the apostrophe “ ’ ” !

54 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Position Relative (HPR)

CSI ... a

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

"a"

[A] set horizontal position relative

Description

n = 1 (default setting)

This sequence moves the print head to the right.

The unit depends on PUM (Positioning Unit Mode) and is either character positions or

defined by the SSU-function (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Example:

CSI 8 a

CSI a

next character goes 8 positions to the right

next character goes one position to the right

Positions beyond the right margin are ignored.

Print Positioning 55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Position Backward (HPB)

CSI ... j

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"j"

106

[A] set horizontal position backward

Description

n = 1 (default setting)

This sequence moves the print head to the left.

The unit depends on PUM (Positioning Unit Mode) and is either character positions or

defined by the SSU-function (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Example:

CSI 8 j

CSI j

next character goes 8 positions to the left

next character goes one position to the left

Positions outside the left margin are ignored.

56 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Position Absolute (VPA)

CSI ... d

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

100

[A] set vertical position absolute

∧

Description

n = 1 (default setting) = current top margin

This sequence moves the print head to a vertical print position absolute.

The unit depends on PUM (Positioning Unit Mode) and is either lines or defined by the

SSU-function (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Example:

CSI 40 d

CSI d

move the active print position to line (or vertical position) 40

move the active print position to top margin

Positions outside the bottom margin are ignored.

Print Positioning 57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Position Relative (VPR)

CSI ... e

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"e"

101

[A] set vertical position relative

Description

n = 1 (default setting)

This sequence moves the print head lines or vertical positions down.

The unit depends on PUM (Positioning Unit Mode) and is either lines or defined by the

SSU-function (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Example:

CSI 12 e

CSI e

move print position 12 lines (or vertical positions) down

move print position one line down

Positions beyond the bottom margin are ignored.

58 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Position Backward (VPB)

CSI ... k

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"k"

107

[A] set vertical position backward

Description

n = 1 (default setting)

This sequence moves the print head lines or vertical positions upward.

The unit depends on PUM (Positioning Unit Mode) and is either lines or defined by the

SSU-function (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Positions beyond the top margin are ignored. This sequence is not valid in Single Sheet

Mode.

Print Positioning 59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal and Vertical Position Absolute (HVP)

CSI ... f

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

;

"f"

102

[B] [C] set horizontal and vertical position absolute

3B n

155 n 59

Description

n = vertical position

n = horizontal position

This sequence moves the print head to a horizontal and vertical print position absolute.

The unit depends on PUM (Positioning Unit Mode) and is either lines or defined by the

SSU-function (Select Size Unit, see page 8).

Example:

CSI f

CSI 20 ; 35 f

move the print position to the top left position on page

move the print position to line (vertical position) 20 and horizontal

character position 35

(if PUM is turned off)

Note that during manual and automatic cut sheet feeding your printer can only reverse

the form a limited distance.

60 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Backspace

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

[A] Backspace

Description

After receiving this code the content of line buffer is printed out.

Then, the print head is moved one position to the left (depending on the current values

of cpi).

Carriage Return

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

[A] carriage return

When the printer receives this code, it prints any data in the print buffer and resets the

line pointer. The active print position is set to the left margin (first possible character posi-

tion).

The code CR can also give a line feed if automatic line feed is selected (refer to Oper-

ator’s Manual).

Print Positioning 61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Form Feed

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

[A] form feed

Description

When the printer receives this code, it prints the data in the print buffer, then advances

the paper from the current pritn position to the top-of-form position on the next page.

Cut sheet:

Forms are ejected. The first print position on the following paper is the first (top) physi-

cally possible position.

Fanfold paper:

The paper is moved by the form length given before. The first print position on the follow-

ing paper is the first (top) physically possible position.

The FF code can also give a carriage return if automatic carriage return is selected (refer

to Operator’s Manual). The next print is started in the column following the print end of

the last print-out if no CR is transmitted.

After switching on the printer the default form length is set to 12 inches (72 lines) per

page (Europe 12"; USA 11").

62 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Partial Line Down

PLD

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

PLD

[A] partial line down

dec.

139

Description

If the preceding character is in normal position, PLD moves the active position down to a

sufficient distance to give the following characters the appearence of being subscripted.

If the preceding character is in a superscript position, PLD moves to normal position.

Partial Line Up

PLU

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

PLU

140

[A] partial line up

If the preceding character is in normal position, PLU moves the active position up a

sufficient distance to give the following characters the appearence of being superscripted.

If the preceding character is in a subscript position, PLU moves to normal position.

Print Positioning 63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reverse Index

Data Structure

ASCII

[B] reverse index

hex.

dec.

141

Description

The code RI moves the active position to the preceding line. An CR option is not permitted.

Next Line

NEL

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

NEL

[B] next line

dec.

133

Description

The code NEL moves the active position to the left margin of the next line. This gives the

same result as the combination of CR (Carrigage Return) and LF (Line Feed).

64 Print Positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphics

Graphic Modes

ESC % ...

CSI 6 z

CSI 5 z

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "%" n

;

DATA

[C] set dpi for graphics

[C] graphics invers

1B 25

27 37

3B DATA

59 DATA

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "6" "z"

9B 36 7A

155 54 122

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "5" "z"

9B 35 7A

155 53 122

[C] graphics unchanged

Description

For n the following parameters are available:

dpi

graphics 60 dpi

graphics 120 dpi

graphics 80 dpi

graphics 240 dpi

graphics 72 dpi

graphics 90 dpi

Data following the graphic-CSI-sequence are printed out as dot pattern. n and n define

the length of the data sequence.

Graphics 65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The vertical resolution is 72 dpi.

The graphics image is printed vertically closed at a line feed of

⁄

inch. (Also see the

720

sequences Spacing Increment (SPI), page 15, and Set Line Spacing (SLS), page 26.

Example: CSI 80 ; SP G).

Example for calculation of n and n :

The length of graphics is 80 bytes.

= number of bytes divided by 256

= int ( ⁄

)

256

= dec.0

= hex.00

= remainder of division of n

= 80 mod 256

= dec.80

= hex.50

Graphics data and text data can be mixed within one line.

Relationship between graphics data and needles:

Needle

1/3

Data byte

Bit 7

•

4/5

Bit 6

•

6/8

Bit 5

9/10

Bit 4

11/13

14/15

16/18

19/20

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

66 Graphics

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Relationship between graphics data and needles:

Needle

Data byte

Bit 7

•

Bit 6

•

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Example 1

10 REM bit image print

20 WIDTH "LPT1:",255

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%3";CHR$(80);CHR$(0);

40 GOSUB 100:LPRINT " 60 dpi"

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%4";CHR$(80);CHR$(0);

60 GOSUB 100:LPRINT " 120 dpi"

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%7";CHR$(80);CHR$(0);

80 GOSUB 100:LPRINT " 240 dpi"

90 END

100 FOR N=1 TO 80

110 LPRINT CHR$(255);

120 NEXT N

130 RETURN

Graphics 67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 2

10 REM bit image print

20 WIDTH "LPT1:",255

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%3";CHR$(10);CHR$(0);

40 GOSUB 130:REM 60 dpi

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%4";CHR$(10);CHR$(0);

60 GOSUB 130:REM 120 dpi

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[6z";

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"%3";CHR$(10);CHR$(0);

90 GOSUB 130:REM reverse 60 dpi

100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[5z";

110 LPRINT

120 END

130 RESTORE

140 FOR I=1 TO 10

150 READ D

160 LPRINT CHR$(D);

170 NEXT I

180 LPRINT " ";

190 RETURN

200 DATA 34,80,138,0,143,0,138,80,34,0

68 Graphics

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Miscellaneous

Load Menu

CSI ... SP q

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

SP "q"

20 71

32 113

[B] load menu

For n the following parameters are available:

hex. dec.

Loading of

Default menu

Menu No. 1

Menu No. 2

Menu No. 3

Menu No. 4 (reserved)

Up to 3 (4) various configurations can be saved with the printer.

Setting the configuration is made by the control panel of the printer (refer to Operator’s

Manual, chapter 2, “Menu”).

Example:

CSI 0 SP q or CSI SP q

load default menu

By using this sequence all settings changed by sequences are reset!

Miscellaneous 69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Automatic Gap Adjustment (AGA)

CSI ... + z

CSI ... + y

Direct Setting of the Print Head Distance

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"+" "z"

2B 7A

43 122

[B] automatic gap adjustment

➊

➋

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

"+" "y"

2B 79

43 121

[B] direct setting of the print head distance

155 n

Description

➊ For the sequence CSI n + z the following parameters are available for n:

hex. dec.

Adjustment (automatic)

automatic adjustment OFF

(print head distance must be set at the printer)

automatic adjustment ON

➋ For the sequence CSI n + y the following parameters are available for n:

hex. dec.

30 48

Setting (direct)

Default value

(is set at the printer)

print head distance in n -steps

Setting the print head distance accords to the respective paper path selected. Unit, adjust

range and default setting depend on the device used.

If the Automatic Gap Adjustment is set to ON, the sequence is ignored.

➋

Example:

Settings of T2060:

Unit =

Adjust range =

Default value =

10 Micrometers

1 – 100

70 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper Handling

CSI Ps1 Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pn5 + v

Data Structure

ASCII

CSI Ps1 Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pn5 "+" "v"

hex.

dec.

9B Ps1 Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pn5 2B 76

155 Ps1 Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pn5 43 118

Description

Ps1 missing or 0:

Printhead does not lift off at the fold

Printhead lifts off at the fold

Ps2 missing or 0:

Printhead position at left margin during paper movement

allowed

Ps3 missing or 0:

Printhead position at left margin during paper movement

not allowed

Printhead position at right margin during paper movement

allowed

Printhead position at right margin during paper movement

not allowed

Pn4 missing or <20 or >136: No limitation of print width

20 … 136:

Pn5 missing or 0 or >30:

1 … 20:

Print width in 1/10 inch

No displacement of the start of the print area (left margin);

Displacement of the start of the print area in 1/10 inches

Shared Interface

CSI Pn + w

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI Pn "+" "w"

9B Pn

155 Pn

2B 77

43 119

Sequence to set hold time of shared I/O after selecting alternate interface.

Pn missing or 0:

Sequence ignored

Pn 1 … 30:

Hold time in seconds

Shared I/O has to be selected in the printer’s menu. Default = 30 s.

Miscellaneous 71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Color Selection (Option)

CSI ... m

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"m"

109

[A] set colors

Description

For n the following parameters are available:

hex.

dec.

color selection

reset color

bold or increased intensity

32 32

50 50

alternate color or decreased intensity

cancels functions of parameters 1 and 2

(normal color or normal intensity)

black

red

green

yellow

blue

➊

➋

33 30

33 31

33 32

33 33

33 34

33 35

33 36

33 39

51 48

51 49

51 50

51 51

51 52

51 53

51 54

51 57

magenta-red

cyan-blue

default color blac

➋

➊

➋

red or magenta, depending on the ribbon used

only available with multi color ribbon

The available colors depend on the ribbon used and must be matched in the menu. If a

ribbon with several black tracks is used, then it is automatically switched every new page

between the tracks.

The relationship between tracks and colors is shown in the following table:

track

yellow, cyan,

magenta, black

(YMCK)

red, green, blue, black

(RGBK)

3 ∗ black, red

black

cyan

magenta

yellow

black

blue

green

red

black

red

72 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The relationship between color selection sequences and the resulting colors for several

ribbon cassettes is shown in the following table:

selected

color

yellow, magenta, cyan,

black

red, green, blue,

black

3 ∗ black, red

(YMCK)

(RGBK)

black

red

black

red *)

black

red

black

red

green

yellow

blue

magenta

cyan

green **)

yellow

blue ***)

magenta

cyan

green

blue

red

****)

red

blue

****)

red = yellow + magenta

***

****

green = yellow + cyan

blue = magenta + cyan

sequence is ignorered

two-pass print is automatically executed

}

The sequence CSI 0 m resets all CSI...m -sequences! A maximum of 16 CSI...m

-sequences can be joined in one sequence: e.g. CSI n ;n ;n m.

Example

10 REM

color selection

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[31m";

30 LPRINT "this is written with red colour"

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[34m";

50 LPRINT "this is written with blue colour"

60 END

Miscellaneous 73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Data Control

CSI ... z

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "9" "z"

9B 39 7A

155 57 122

[C] set bit 8 = 1

[C] set bit 8 = 0

[C] bit 8 unchanged

➊

➋

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "8" "z"

9B 38 7A

155 56 122

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "7" "z"

9B 37 7A

155 55 122

Description

➊ By means of this MTPL-sequence the eighth data bit is set to “1”.

This results in accordance with the selected character set characters from the national

character set or italic characters to be printed.

➋ By means of this MTPL-sequence the eighth data bit is set to “0”.

This means that wrong character printing caused by the eighth data bit set high by the

system can be avoided.

CSI 9 z is ignored

– if Extended Character Set is selected,

– if Graphic Mode is selected

Note that following the sequence CSI 8 z all subsequent control sequences must begin

with an “ESC [ ”, because CSI (9B) cannot be represented by a 7 bit code.This remains

in effect until the printer receives either the sequence ESC [ 9 z or ESC [ 7 z .

STOP

74 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM input data control

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[7z";

30 GOSUB 90

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[9z";

50 GOSUB 90

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[8z";

70 GOSUB 90

80 END

90 FOR I=97 TO 103:LPRINT CHR$(I);:NEXT I

100 FOR I=161 TO 167:LPRINT CHR$(I);:NEXT I

110 LPRINT:LPRINT

120 RETURN

Miscellaneous 75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sheet Feeder/Paperway

Eject Form

CSI ... {

CSI 2 J

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

;

"{"

123

[A] set sheed feeder

;

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "2" "J"

9B 32 4A

155 50 74

[C] eject form

➊

Description

With the sequence CSI n ; n ; n { for n the following parameters are available:

hex.

dec.

sheet feeder

32 31

32 32

32 33

33 31

35 30

50 49

50 50

50 51

51 49

53 48

cut sheet paper (manual)

fanfold paper (tractor 1)

fanfold paper (tractor 2)

bin 1 (front)

bin 2 (rear)

bin 3 (reserved)

stacker 1 of the sorter

move paper to normal print position

(return of view- or tear-off position)

move paper to tear-off position

move paper to view position

➋

➌

➍

➎

➏

➐

➑

35 31

35 32

53 49

53 50

➒

➓

35 31

35 34

53 49

53 52

cuts fanfold paper at the next perforation

cut is made above/below the current line

➀

➁

[C] specifies the horizontal print head position during the paper loading process

(is ignored with new printer models)

[C] specifies an optional correction value for the vertical load position in n∗ ⁄ inches

(top of form adjustment or vertical alignment, also see “Positioning the first print

line (Phys.adj)”, Operator’s Manual, chapter 4).

76 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

➊ Paper is ejected also by FF or the limit, fixed by the form length or the bottom margin.

➋ This sequence selects manual cut sheet paper process.

➌ This sequence selects fanfold paper process for tractor 1.

➍ This sequence selects fanfold paper process for optional tractor 2. If an optional tractor 2

is installed, sequences for selecting the automatic single sheet feeder (ASF) are ignored.

➎ Selection of bin 1 or 2.

Vertical alignment of the first printable line in steps of n ⁄ inch downwards is optional.

n is set to

⁄

inch (one line at 6 lpi) in the default menu.

➏ Depending on the hardware, up to 9 bins can be selected.

∧

(bin 1 - 9 = CSI 21 - CSI 29).

➐ Depending on the hardware and in the case a sorter has been installed, up to 19 exit

ports can be selected.

∧

(stacker 1 - 19 = CSI 31 - CSI 49).

➑ The page is set from view or tear-off position (perforation) to print position.

This means, that the print head moves to the current position or to the first possible

line of the following document.

➒ Independent of the menu settings the paper is set to tear-off position.

This sequence has no affect, if the respective position is just set manual (by means of

**)

the “Tear” key) or automatically (printer menu setting: Parameter group “Auto Tear”).

➓ Independent of the menu settings the paper is set to view position (last printed line).

This sequence has no affect, if the respective position is just set manual (by means of

the “Tear” key) or automatically (printer menu setting: Parameter group “Auto Tear”).

➀ This sequence is only available if an optional cutter is installed and cuts fanfold paper

at the next perforation.

➁ This sequence is only available if an optional cutter is installed; it cuts above the

current line, if the text to be printed was ended with a CR (hex. 0D, dec. 13), it cuts

below the line, if the text to be printed was ended with a LF (hex. 0A, dec. 10).

The sheet feeder - if installed and connected - has to be selected via the menu of the

printer (refer to the Operator’s Manual).

**)

If a cutting device is installed.

If no cutting device is installed.

Miscellaneous 77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For compatibility to former printers a sequence like CSI 21 ; x ; n { will also be accepted.

In this case, the parameter x will be ignored.

Paper is inserted on receipt of:

CR (hex.0D; dec.13) if CR = LF is selected

LF (hex.0A; dec.10)

VT (hex.0B; dec.11)

print data

Example

10 REM

sheet feeder

15 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";:REM set form length

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[21{";

30 LPRINT "This text is on a form"

40 LPRINT "from magazine one."

50 LPRINT CHR$(12):REM form feed

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[22{";

70 LPRINT "This text is on a form"

80 LPRINT "from magazine two."

90 END

78 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reset to Initial State (RIS)

ESC c

CSI 6

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "c"

1B 63

27 99

[A] reset to initial state

[C] reset to initial state

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "6"

9B 36 7E

155 54 126

Description

Example

The printer is initialized, which means it has the same status as just after power switch-on.

All parameters set by CSI-sequences are cleared. The active print position is set on the

top position of a page (document).

10 REM initialization

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[10s";:REM set left margin

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[7w";:REM set 17.1 cpi

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[1y";:REM set NLQ

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[1z";:REM set subscript

60 GOSUB 100

70 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[6 ";

80 GOSUB 100

90 END

100 LPRINT "Matrix Printer"

110 LPRINT:LPRINT

120 RETURN

Miscellaneous 79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Command Set

CSI ? ...

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "?"

9B 3F

155 63

[B] command set

126

Description

For n the following parameters are available:

hex.

dec.

command set

MTPL

MTPL + IBM-Graphics-Printer

MTPL + IBM-Proprinter XL

MTPL + IBM-Proprinter XL 24e

MTPL + EPSON FX

MTPL + EPSON LQ

MTPL + NEC P60/70

31 30

49 48

end of special command interpretations and return to

standard command set, e.g. end of Barcode interpretation

start of Barcode interpretation

31 31

49 49

➊

*) (“Tally Printer Language”)

➊ For more information see the Barcode Programmer’s Manual.

80 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Activation of Character Sets

ESC ...

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ZG locking shift LS0

➊

➋

➌

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ZG locking shift LS1

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC n

ZG locking shift LS2, LS3, LS1R, LS2R, LS3R

Description

➊ Activation of G0 for codes 21 - 7E

➋ Activation of G1 for codes 21 - 7E

➌ For n the following parameters are available:

hex. dec.

locking shift (LS)

}

110

111

124

125

126

[B] LS2: Activation of G2 for codes 21 - 7E

[B] LS3: Activation of G3 for codes 21 - 7E

[B] LS3R: Activation of G3 for codes A1 - FE

[B] LS2R: Activation of G2 for codes A1 - FE

[A] LS1R: Activation of G1 for codes A1 - FE

These sequences activate various character sets (also see Invocation of Character Set

G0 - G3, page 83). 4 registers - from G0 until G3 - are supported. Into each of these

registers a graphic character set by a designation sequence can be placed.

Miscellaneous 81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A set of up to 94 characters is made ready for use.

Example

10 open "lpt1:" as #1

20 width #1,32000

’Example "Locking Shift"

40 t1$=" French Characters Are Printed"

50 t2$=" German Characters Are Printed"

60 print #1,chr$(27),"+R" ’Designate G3 <— French Substitution

80 print #1,chr$(27),"o" ’Locking Shift 3

90 print #1,§Öä",t1$ ’(French Substitutes)

100 print #1,chr$(27),"+K" ’Designate G3 <— German Substitution

110 ’Table

’Table

120 print #1,chr$(27),"o" ’Locking Shift 3

130 print #1,§Öä",t2$

140 end

’(German Substitutes)

82 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Designation of Character Set G0

Designation of Character Set G1

Designation of Character Set G2

Designation of Character Set G3

ESC ( ...

ESC ) ...

ESC * ...

ESC + ...

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC n

designation of character sets

Description

Designation of character sets is a process by which a set of graphic symbols is con-

nected to the usable character set registers G0, G1, G2 and G3.

For n and F the following parameters are available:

hex. dec. character set

(

)

2A 42

2B 43

[A] G0

[A] G1

[B] G2

[B] G3

hex. dec. character set

‘

4B 75

4C 76

5A 90

US-ASCII

UK-ASCII

Swedish/Finnish

German

Portuguese

French

Italian

Spanish

Norwegian

128 Table 437 (DOS Standard)

130 Table 850 (DOS Europe)

135 Table 852 (DOS Latin 2)

132 Table 860 (DOS Portugal)

Miscellaneous 83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

hex. dec. character set

133 Table 863 (DOS French-Canadian)

134 Table 865 (DOS Norway)

8E 142 Table 866 Standard (DOS Cyrillic)

143 Table 866 Ukraine

144 Table 866 Kazakhstan

145 Kamenicky (combination of table 437 and 852)

146 Mazovia (code page 437 with polish characters)

112 (ASCII) Microsoft Windows Codepage 1250 (Latin 2)

113 (ASCII) Microsoft Windows Codepage 1251 (Cyrillic)

114 (ASCII) Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 (Latin 1)

(ASCII) ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1)

(ASCII) ISO 8859-2 (Latin 2)

2A 42

3C 60

(ASCII) ISO 8859-5 (Latin Cyrillic)

(ASCII) Cro-ASCII character set (Codepage 437 with croatic

characters)

Other character sets may be available on request.

If the mode is selected by the printer menu, the MTPL-character set US-ASCII is active

(default configuration).

The slashed zero as well as the IBM and Epson character sets can only be selected via

the printer control panel.

By default the graphic character set G0 is automatically activated.

This functions do not deal with printing styles like “Italic”, “Helvetica” or “Courier”. Instead,

they select character sets defined by the meaning of their symbols. The meaning of the

sets may be Greek or French character sets or things like math symbols and line drawing

characters.

The available character sets may vary due to used printer type.

84 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM

character sets

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(B";

30 LPRINT "US-ASCII: ";:GOSUB 130

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(A";

50 LPRINT "UK-ASCII: ";:GOSUB 130

60 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(K";

70 LPRINT "GERMAN : ";:GOSUB 130

80 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(R";

90 LPRINT "FRENCH : ";:GOSUB 130

100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"(Y";

110 LPRINT "ITALIAN : ";:GOSUB 130

120 END

130 LPRINT CHR$(35);CHR$(36);CHR$(64);

140 LPRINT CHR$(91);CHR$(92);CHR$(93);

150 LPRINT CHR$(94);CHR$(96);CHR$(123);

160 LPRINT CHR$(124);CHR$(125);CHR$(126)

170 RETURN

Miscellaneous 85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Activation of Characters

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

142

[B] ZG single shift SS2

[B] ZG single shift SS3

➊

➋

ASCII

hex.

dec.

143

Description

➊ Activation of one single character from G2 (“single shift 2”).

➋ Activation of one single character from G3 (“single shift 3”).

The functions SO and SI each activate one single character of the graphic character set

into the codes 21 - 7E.

The character following the code for the changeover is replaced once.

The graphic character set activated by the locking shift function (page 81, “Activation of

Character Sets”) will not be changed with this function.

Example

10 open "lpt1:" as #1

20 width #1,32000

’Example "Single Shift"

40 t1$=" French a accent is printed"

50 t2$=" funny a is printed"

60 print #1,chr$(27),"+R" ’Designate G3 <— French Substitution

’Table

’Single Shift 3

’Transfer And Print:

’Code 40hex (French substitute)

’Transfer And Print:

’Code 40hex (default character)

80 print #1,chr$(143);

90 print #1,"@",t1$

100

110 print #1,"@",t2$

120

130 end

86 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Graphic description of locking shift/single shift (pages 81 - 86):

Active character set

Invocation of one

graphic character

Invocation of

graphic sets

Designation of

graphic sets

C = control code set

G = graphic sets

Repertoire of

graphic sets

Miscellaneous 87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Size of Character Set (1 Character Set)

Size of Character Set (2 Character Sets)

CSI ? 50 h

CSI ? 50

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "?" "5" "0" "h"

9B 3F 35 30 68

155 63 53 48 104

[A] loading a character set

with 256 characters

➊

➋

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "?" "5" "0" " "

[A] loading 2 character sets

with 94 characters each

9B 3F 35 30 69

155 63 53 48 105

Description

In an 8 bit environment, the MTPL standard allows the use of 2 character sets at the same

time. In this case each character set contains 94 and 96 characters respectively and can

be allocated to the lower or upper half of the code table.

(Example: The control code SI activates G0 in the code range 21 - 7E and therefore loads

G0 in the lower half of the code table - see also function “Activation of Character Sets” on

page 79).

➊ This function causes a character set with 256 characters to be loaded by the control

codes SO, SI, ESC n or ESC o. Thus, the activation of character sets with the using

of the codes ESC | , ESC } and ESC becomes ineffective.

This function can be used, for example, to activate a table of PC code page tables.

➋ With this sequence, the function set by CSI ? 50 h is turned off. Thus, the activation of

character sets with 94 and 96 characters becomes effective again.

If the setting “Character 8/0 to 9/F printable” is active (default setting) ESC [ ? 53 l has

to be sent instead of CSI ? 53 l, because the CSI character is not accepted as control

code.

STOP

88 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Proportional Spacing (Draft) OFF

Proportional Spacing (Draft) ON

CSI ? 51 h

CSI ? 51

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "?" "5" "1" "h"

9B 3F 35 31 68

155 63 53 49 104

[A] disabling proportional spacing

in print quality DRAFT

➊

➋

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "?" "5" "1" " "

[A] enabling proportional spacing

in print quality DRAFT (default)

9B 3F 35 31 69

155 63 53 49 105

Description

➊ This sequence disables proportional spacing for the print quality DRAFT. The printer

switches automatically to NLQ, if DRAFT and proportional spacing are selected.

➋ This sequence enables proportional spacing for the print quality DRAFT. It is the

default setting.

Font Selection for NLQ/LQ only

Font Selection

CSI ? 52 h

CSI ? 52

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "?" "5" "2" "h"

9B 3F 35 32 68

155 63 53 50 104

[A] print control ignores the font IDs of the

default character generator

➊

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "?" "5" "2" " "

[A] print control does not ignore the font IDs

9B 3F 35 32 69

155 63 53 50 105

of the default character generator

(default)

➋

Description

➊ The font settings (CSI 10 ... 19 m) are only valid and can only be selected for the print

qualities NLQ and LQ.

➋ All print qualities (Draft, NLQ, LQ) are valid, if fonts are selected using sequence

CSI 10 ... 19 m. This is the default setting.

Miscellaneous 89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Code Area Expansion ON

Print Code Area Expansion OFF

CSI ? 53 h

CSI ? 53

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "?" "5" "3" "h"

9B 3F 35 33 68

155 63 53 51 104

[A] print code area expansion on

➊

➋

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "?" "5" "3" " "

[A] print code area expansion off

9B 3F 35 33 69

155 63 53 51 105

Description

➊ This code sequence causes the printout of the higher control codes (ASCII 128 to 159)

in the form of characters and symbols instead of the repetition of the functions of

ASCII codes 0 to 31.

➋ When the printer receives this code sequence, the ASCII codes 128 to 159 are used

as duplicates of the functions of the lower control codes 0 to 31.

Print Transparent Characters

CSI Pn … SP r

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI Pn

9B Pn

155 Pn

…

SP "r"

20 72

32 114

Up to 16 numeric parameters. The parameter represents the decimal code of a printable

character. If no parameter is specified, the sequence is ignored.

Example:

CSI 129 SP r: Print “Umlaut u” (if character set is PC table 437).

90 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer Identification (DA)

CSI ... c

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "0" "c"

9B 30 63

155 48 99

[B] request for printer indentification

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI "?" ...

9B 3F ...

155 63 ...

"c"

Response from printer

Description

By this functions it is possible to get for example informations of device type and firmware

revision or some capabilities like paper supply bins of the connected printer.

This sequence can only be used if the printer is connected to a computer with a serial

interface or another bi-directional interface.

Miscellaneous 91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Device Status Report (DSR)

CSI ... n

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CSI n

155 n

"n"

110

[B] device status report

Description

For n the following parameters are available:

hex. dec.

status report

direction

“Ready, no malfunction”

“Busy, no malfunction”

“Some malfunction detected”

printer → computer

Request of device status report computer → printer

By these sequences it is possible to request the current printer status.

This sequence can only be used if the printer is connected to the computer with a serial

interface or a other bi-directional interface.

The printer sends the complete sequence back to host with parameters 0, 1 or 3.

92 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enquiry for Status

ENQ

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

ENQ

enquiry for status

dec.

Description

With this code it is possible to get a status byte from the printer:

Status byte:

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

= BUSY

= offline

= paper end

= always 1

= cover open

= buffer overflow

= parity or framing error

= always 0

This code concerns only serial data transfer with ENQ/STX protocol.

Miscellaneous 93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fill Character

NUL

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

NUL

fill character without further meaning

dec.

128

Start of Text Block

STX

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

STX

start of text block

Start of a text block.

With this code any error message (parity error, memory overflow) is cleared.

This code concerns only serial data transfer with ENQ/STX protocol.

94 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

End of Text Block

ETX

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ETX

end of text block

Description

End of a text block.

This code concerns only serial data transfer with ACK/NAK protocol.

For a detailed description see the documentation which comes with your printer.

Positive Acknowledge

ACK

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ACK

positive acknowledge

By sending the positive acknowledge code ACK (printer ✂ host) it is possible to transmit

a data block to the printer and thus transfer it into the printer’s line buffer.

This code concerns only serial data transfer with ACK/NAK protocol.

For a detailed description see the documentation which comes with your printer.

Miscellaneous 95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Negative Acknowledge

NAK

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

NAK

negative acknowledge

dec.

Description

By sending the negative acknowledge code NAK a parity error (character with the wrong

parity) is indicated in the data block to be transmitted and then the data block is deleted.

This code concerns only serial data transfer with ACK/NAK protocol.

For a detailed description see the documentation which comes with your printer.

Clear Print Buffer

CAN

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

CAN

clear print buffer

When the printer receives this code, the print buffer is completely cleared.

This code only clears the contents of the print buffer. It does not affect any control codes

which have previously been sent to the printer.

96 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delete

DEL

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

DEL

[A] delete

dec.

127

Description

With this code the line buffer is cleared.

Acoustic Alarm

BEL

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

BEL

[A] acoustic alarm

This code causes an acoustic alarm.

Miscellaneous 97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Start Character “Escape”

ESC

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

ESC

[A] start character ESC

dec.

Description

ESC is the start character for a subsequent program sequence (the string $$ can be used

instead of ESC if option is selected in the printer setup).

MTPL-Start Character “Control Sequence Introducer”

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

CSI

[A] MTPL-start character CSI

dec.

155

Description

MTPL-start character for a subsequent program sequence.

Do not use “CSI” in any other printer command language than MTPL. Use instead “ESC [”

if using other emulations.

STOP

98 Miscellaneous

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A

Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sorted by Sequences

Function

Sequence

Page

ACK

BEL

CAN

control code ACK (Positive Acknowledge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

acoustic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

control code BS (Backspace) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

control code CAN (Cancel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

control code CR (Carriage Return) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

MTPL-start character for program sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

graphics 60 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 120 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 80 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 240 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 72 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 90 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

right justification and centering OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

emphasized mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

MTPL command set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

end of command interpretations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

start of Barcode interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

MTPL + IBM-Graphics-Printer command set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

MTPL + IBM-Proprinter XL command set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

MTPL + IBM-Proprinter XL 24e command set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

MTPL + EPSON FX command set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

size of character set (2 character sets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

size of character set (1 character set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

proportional spacing (Draft) off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

proportional spacing (Draft) on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

font selection for NLQ/LQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

font selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

print code area expansion on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

print code area expansion off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

MTPL + EPSON LQ command set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

MTPL + NEC P60/70 command set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

direct setting of the print head distance (default value) . . . . . . . . . . 70

automatic gap adjustment OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

CSI

CSI % 3 n ; n ; DATA

CSI % 4 n ; n ; DATA

CSI % 5 n ; n ; DATA

CSI % 6 n ; n ; DATA

CSI % 7 n ; n ; DATA

CSI % 8 n ; n ; DATA

CSI % 9 n ; n ; DATA

CSI : y

CSI = z

CSI > z

CSI ? 1 ~

CSI ? 10 ~

CSI ? 11 ~

CSI ? 2 ~

CSI ? 3 ~

CSI ? 4 ~

CSI ? 5 ~

CSI ? 50 l

CSI ? 50 h

CSI ? 51 h

CSI ? 51 l

CSI ? 52 h

CSI ? 52 l

CSI ? 53 h

CSI ? 53 l

CSI ? 6 ~

CSI ? 7 ~

CSI 0 + y

CSI 0 + z

A-2 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sequence

Function

Page

CSI 0 c

CSI 0 g

CSI 0 m

CSI 0 n

request for printer identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

clear horizontal tab stop at current position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

clear all selected fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

reset color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

device status report: “Ready, no malfunction” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

cut sheet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

CSI 0 n ; n {

CSI 0 SP I

CSI 0 SP K

CSI 0 SP L

CSI 0 SP q

CSI 0 SP X

CSI 0 w

size unit Decipoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

horizontal character spacing 10 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

vertical spacing 6 lpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

load default menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

high print quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

horizontal spacing 5 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

draft print quality (DPQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

superscript ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

automatic gap adjustment ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

clear all vertical tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

bold or increased intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

device status report: “Busy, no malfunction” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

CSI 0 y

CSI 0 z

CSI 1 + z

CSI 1 g

CSI 1 m

CSI 1 n

CSI 1 SP I

CSI 1 SP K

CSI 1 SP L

CSI 1 SP q

CSI 1 SP X

CSI 1 w

CSI 1 y

CSI 1 z

CSI 10 m

CSI 10 y

CSI 10 z

size unit Millimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

horizontal character spacing 6 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

vertical spacing 4 lpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

load menu No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

medium print quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

horizontal spacing 6 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

near letter quality (NLQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

subscript ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

font 0 (DPQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

right justification and centering OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

mikroscript ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

^{CSI 11}l

CSI 11 h

CSI 11 m

CSI 11 w

CSI 11 y

CSI 12 m

CSI 12 w

CSI 12 y

turn OFF positioning unit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

turn ON positioning unit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

font 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

horizontal spacing 20 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

fast draft print quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

font 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

horizontal spacing 10 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

letter print quality (LQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Summary of Possible Codes A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sequence

Function

Page

CSI 12 z

CSI 13 m

CSI 13 y

CSI 13 z

CSI 14 m

CSI 15 m

CSI 16 m

CSI 17 m

CSI 18 m

CSI 19 m

CSI 2 g

double height ON (upper half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

font 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

high resolution print quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

double height ON (lower half) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

font 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

font 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

font 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

font 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

font 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

font 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

clear all horizontal tab stops at current line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

eject form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

change color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI 2 J

CSI 2 m

CSI 2 SP I

CSI 2 SP K

CSI 2 SP L

CSI 2 SP q

CSI 2 SP X

CSI 2 w

CSI 2 y

CSI 2 z

CSI 21 m

size unit Decipoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

horizontal character spacing 15 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

vertical spacing 3 lpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

load menu No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

low print quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

horizontal spacing 7,5 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

proportional mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

double height OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

super-/sub- and microscript OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

double underline mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

bin 1 (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

normal color or normal intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

bin 2 (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

italic mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

bin 3 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

underline mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

proportional mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

clear all horizontal tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

italic mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

device status report: “Some malfunction detected” . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

CSI 21 n ; n {

CSI 22 m

CSI 22 n ; n {

CSI 23 m

CSI 23 n ; n {

CSI 24 m

CSI 26 m

CSI 3 g

CSI 3 m

CSI 3 n

CSI 3 SP I

CSI 3 SP K

CSI 3 SP L

CSI 3 SP q

size unit Decididots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

horizontal character spacing 6 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

vertical spacing 12 lpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

load menu No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

A-4 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sequence

Function

Page

CSI 3 w

CSI 3 z

CSI 30 m

CSI 31 m

CSI 31 n ; n {

CSI 32 m

CSI 33 m

CSI 34 m

CSI 35 m

CSI 36 m

CSI 37 m

CSI 39 m

CSI 4 g

horizontal spacing 8,6 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

line density 6 lpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

color black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

color red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

output paper to stacker 1 (sorter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

color green . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

color yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

color blue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

color magenta red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

color cyan-blue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

color white . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

default color black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

clear all vertical tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

underline mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

CSI 4 m

CSI 4 SP I

CSI 4 SP L

CSI 4 SP q

CSI 4 w

CSI 4 y

CSI 4 z

size unit Mils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vertical spacing 8 lpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

load menu No. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

horizontal spacing 10 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

NLQ at 10 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

line density 8 lpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

request for device status report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

fanfold paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

CSI 5 n

CSI 5 n ; n {

CSI 5 SP I

CSI 5 w

CSI 5 y

Basic Measuring Unit BMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

horizontal spacing 12 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

NLQ at 12 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

graphics normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

proportional mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

move paper to normal print position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

move paper to tear-off position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

move paper to view position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

overline mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

overline mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

reset to initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

CSI 5 z

CSI 50 m

CSI 50 n ; n {

CSI 51 n ; n {

CSI 52 n ; n {

CSI 53 m

CSI 55 m

CSI 6 ~

CSI 6 SP I

CSI 6 w

CSI 6 z

size unit Micrometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

horizontal spacing 15 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

graphics invers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

CSI 7 SP I

size unit Pixels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Summary of Possible Codes A-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sequence

Function

Page

CSI 7 w

CSI 7 y

CSI 7 z

CSI 8 w

CSI 8 y

CSI 8 z

CSI 9 SP L

CSI 9 w

CSI 9 y

CSI 9 z

CSI n ’

CSI n + y

CSI n a

CSI n d

CSI n e

CSI n j

CSI n k

CSI n p

CSI n q

CSI n SP \

CSI n SP C

CSI n SP f

CSI n SP g

CSI n SP h

CSI n SP U

CSI n SP V

CSI n t

horizontal spacing 17,1 cpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

proportional mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

set bit 8 = unchanged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

double strike OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

right justification ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

set bit 8 = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

vertical spacing 2 lpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

double strike ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

centering ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

set bit 8 = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

horizontal position absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

direct setting of the print head distance (in n -steps) . . . . . . . . . . . 70

horizontal position relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

vertical position absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

vertical position relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

horizontal position backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

vertical position backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Horizontal Motion Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

horizontal step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

additional character spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

graphic size selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

reduced character spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

character spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

line home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

line limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

form lenght in lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI n v

vertical tab stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

graphic size modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

horizontal- and vertical position absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

CSI n ; n SP B

CSI n ; n f

CSI n ; n r

top and bottom margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI n ; n s

left and right margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

select font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

spacing increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

set horizontal tab stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

print transparent characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

shared interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

CSI n ; n SP D

CSI n ; n SP G

CSI n1 u

CSI Pn … SP r

CSI Pn + w

CSI Ps1 Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pn5 + v paper handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

A-6 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sequence

Function

Page

DEL

control code DEL (Delete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

control code ENQ (Enquiry for Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

MTPL-start character for program sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

designate character set G0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

designate character set G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

designate character set G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

designate character set G3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

LS3R: Activation of G3 for codes A1 - FE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

LS2R: Activation of G2 for codes A1 - FE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

LS1R: Activation of G1 for codes A1 - FE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

reset to initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

set horizontal tab stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

LS2: Activation of G2 for codes 21 - 7E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

LS2: Activation of G3 for codes 21 - 7E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

control code ETX (End of Text Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

control code FF (Form Feed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

control code HT (horizontal step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

control code HTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

control code IND (Vertical Index) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

control code LF (Line Feed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

control code NAK (Negative Acknowledge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

control code NEL (Next Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

control code NUL (fill character) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

control code PLD (Partial Line Down) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

control code PLU (Partial Line Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

control code RI (Reverse Index) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

single shift 3 (SS3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

single shift 2 (SS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

control code STX (Start of Text Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

control code VT (Vertical Tab Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

control code VTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

ENQ

ESC

ESC ( F

ESC ) F

ESC * F

ESC + F

ESC |

ESC }

ESC ~

ESC c

ESC H

ESC n

ESC o

ETX

HTS

IND

NAK

NEL

NUL

PLD

PLU

STX

VTS

Summary of Possible Codes A-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sorted by Functions

Function

Sequence

Page

acoustic alarm

BEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

CSI n SP \ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

CSI 0 + z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

CSI 1 + z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

additional character spacing

automatic gap adjustment OFF

automatic gap adjustment ON

Basic Measuring Unit BMU

bin 1 (front)

CSI 5 SP I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI 21 n ; n { . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

bin 2 (rear)

CSI 22 n ; n { . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

bin 3 (option)

CSI 23 n ; n { . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

bold or increased intensity

centering ON

change color

CSI 1 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI 9 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

CSI 2 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI n SP g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

CSI 3 g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

CSI 2 g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

CSI 0 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSI 1 g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

CSI 4 g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

CSI 0 g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

CSI 30 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI 34 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI 36 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI 32 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI 35 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI 31 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI 37 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI 33 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

ACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

CAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

ENQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

ETX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

FF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

HT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

character spacing

clear all horizontal tab stops

clear all horizontal tab stops at current line

clear all selected fonts

clear all vertical tab stops

clear horizontal tab stop at current position

color black

color blue

color cyan-blue

color green

color magenta red

color red

color white

color yellow

control code ACK (Positive Acknowledge)

control code BS (Backspace)

control code CAN (Cancel)

control code CR (Carriage Return)

control code DEL (Delete)

control code ENQ (Enquiry for Status)

control code ETX (End of Text Block)

control code FF (Form Feed)

control code HT (horizontal step)

A-8 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Function

Sequence

Page

control code HTS

HTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

IND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

NAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

NEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

NUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

PLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

RI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

STX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

VT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

VTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

control code IND (Vertical Index)

control code LF (Line Feed)

control code NAK (Negative Acknowledge)

control code NEL (Next Line)

control code NUL (fill character)

control code PLD (Partial Line Down)

control code PLU (Partial Line Up)

control code RI (Reverse Index)

control code STX (Start of Text Block)

control code VT (Vertical Tab Stop)

control code VTS

cut sheet paper

CSI 0 n ; n { . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

default color black

CSI 39 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

ESC ( F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

ESC ) F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

ESC * F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

ESC + F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

CSI 1 n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

CSI 0 n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

CSI 3 n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

CSI 0 + y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

CSI n + y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

CSI 2 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

CSI 13 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

CSI 12 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

CSI 8 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

CSI 9 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

CSI 21 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

CSI 0 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

CSI 2 J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

CSI = z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

CSI > z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

CSI ? 10 ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

designate character set G0

designate character set G1

designate character set G2

designate character set G3

device status report: “Busy, no malfunction”

device status report: “Ready, no malfunction”

device status report: “Some malfunction detected”

direct setting of the print head distance (default value)

direct setting of the print head distance (in n -steps)

double height OFF

double height ON (lower half)

double height ON (upper half)

double strike OFF

double strike ON

double underline mode

draft print quality (DPQ)

eject form

emphasized mode ON

end of command interpretations

fanfold paper

CSI 5 n ; n { . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

fast draft print quality

font 0 (DPQ)

CSI 11 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

CSI 10 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Summary of Possible Codes A-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Function

Sequence

Page

font 1

font 2

font 3

font 4

font 5

font 6

font 7

font 8

CSI 11 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSI 12 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSI 13 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSI 14 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSI 15 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSI 16 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSI 17 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSI 18 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSI 19 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

CSI ? 52 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

CSI ? 52 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

font 9

font selection for NLQ/LQ

font selection

form lenght in lines

graphic size modification

graphic size selection

graphics 120 dpi

CSI n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI n ; n SP B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

CSI n SP C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

CSI % 4 n ; n ; DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 240 dpi

CSI % 6 n ; n ; DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 240 dpi

CSI % 7 n ; n ; DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 60 dpi

CSI % 3 n ; n ; DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 72 dpi

CSI % 8 n ; n ; DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 80 dpi

CSI % 5 n ; n ; DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics 90 dpi

CSI % 9 n ; n ; DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

graphics invers

graphics normal

high print quality

CSI 6 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

CSI 5 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

CSI 0 SP X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

CSI 13 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

CSI 0 SP K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

CSI 2 SP K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

CSI 1 SP K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

CSI 3 SP K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

CSI n p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

CSI n ’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

CSI n j . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

CSI n a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

CSI 12 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

CSI 4 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

CSI 5 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

CSI 6 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

high resolution print quality

horizontal character spacing 10 cpi

horizontal character spacing 15 cpi

horizontal character spacing 6 cpi

Horizontal Motion Index

horizontal position absolute

horizontal position backward

horizontal position relative

horizontal spacing 10 cpi

horizontal spacing 12 cpi

horizontal spacing 15 cpi

A-10 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Function

Sequence

Page

horizontal spacing 17,1 cpi

horizontal spacing 20 cpi

horizontal spacing 5 cpi

horizontal spacing 6 cpi

horizontal spacing 7,5 cpi

horizontal spacing 8,6 cpi

horizontal step

CSI 7 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

CSI 11 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

CSI 0 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

CSI 1 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

CSI 2 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

CSI 3 w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

CSI n q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

horizontal- and vertical position absolute

italic mode OFF

italic mode ON

CSI n ; n f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

CSI 23 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

CSI 3 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

left and right margin

CSI n ; n s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

letter print quality (LQ)

line density 6 lpi

line density 8 lpi

line home

line limit

line spacing

load default menu

load menu No. 1

load menu No. 2

load menu No. 3

load menu No. 4

low print quality

LS1R: Activation of G1 for codes A1 - FE

LS2: Activation of G2 for codes 21 - 7E

LS2: Activation of G3 for codes 21 - 7E

LS2R: Activation of G2 for codes A1 - FE

LS3R: Activation of G3 for codes A1 - FE

medium print quality

CSI 12 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

CSI 3 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

CSI 4 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

CSI n SP U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

CSI n SP V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

CSI n SP h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

CSI 0 SP q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

CSI 1 SP q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

CSI 2 SP q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

CSI 3 SP q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

CSI 4 SP q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

CSI 2 SP X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

ESC ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

ESC n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

ESC o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

ESC } . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

ESC | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

CSI 1 SP X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

CSI 10 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

mikroscript ON

move paper to normal print position

move paper to tear-off position

move paper to view position

MTPL + EPSON FX command set

MTPL + EPSON LQ command set

MTPL + IBM-Graphics-Printer command set

MTPL + IBM-Proprinter XL 24e command set

CSI 50 n ; n { . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

CSI 51 n ; n { . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

CSI 52 n ; n { . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

CSI ? 5 ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

CSI ? 6 ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

CSI ? 2 ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

CSI ? 4 ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Summary of Possible Codes A-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Function

Sequence

Page

MTPL + IBM-Proprinter XL command set

MTPL + NEC P60/70 command set

MTPL command set

MTPL-start character for program sequence

near letter quality (NLQ)

NLQ at 10 cpi

CSI ? 3 ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

CSI ? 7 ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

CSI ? 1 ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

CSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

CSI 1 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

CSI 4 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

CSI 5 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

CSI 22 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

NLQ at 12 cpi

normal color or normal intensity

output paper to stacker 1 (sorter)

overline mode OFF

CSI 31 n ; n { . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

CSI 55 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

CSI 53 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

CSI Ps1 Ps2 Ps3 Pn4 Pn5 + v . . . . . . . . . 71

CSI ? 53 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

CSI ? 53 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

CSI Pn … SP r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

CSI 50 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

CSI 7 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

CSI 2 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

CSI 26 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

CSI ? 51 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

CSI ? 51 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

CSI n SP f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

CSI 5 n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

CSI 0 c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

CSI 0 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CSI 6 ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

ESC c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

CSI : y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

CSI 10 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

CSI 8 y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

overline mode ON

paper handling

print code area expansion ON

print code area expansion OFF

print transparent characters

proportional mode OFF

proportional mode ON

proportional spacing (Draft) off

proportional spacing (Draft) on

reduced character spacing

request for device status report

request for printer identification

reset color

reset to initial state

right justification and centering OFF

right justification ON

select font

CSI n ; n SP D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

set bit 8 = 0

set bit 8 = 1

set bit 8 = unchanged

set horizontal tab stop

CSI 8 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

CSI 9 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

CSI 7 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

CSI n1 u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

ESC H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

set horizontal tab stop

A-12 Summary of Possible Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Function

Sequence

Page

shared interface

single shift 2 (SS2)

single shift 3 (SS3)

size of character set (1 character set)

size of character set (2 character sets)

size unit Decididots

size unit Decipoints

CSI Pn + w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

SO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

SI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

CSI ? 50 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

CSI ? 50 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

CSI 3 SP I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI 0 SP I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI 2 SP I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI 6 SP I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI 1 SP I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI 4 SP I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI 7 SP I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

size unit Micrometers

size unit Millimeters

size unit Mils

size unit Pixels

spacing increment

CSI n ; n SP G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

start of Barcode interpretation

subscript ON

super-/sub- and microscript OFF

superscript ON

CSI ? 11 ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

CSI 1 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

CSI 2 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

CSI 0 z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

top and bottom margin

CSI n ; n r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

turn OFF positioning unit mode

turn ON positioning unit mode

underline mode OFF

underline mode ON

vertical position absolute

vertical position backward

vertical position relative

vertical spacing 12 lpi

vertical spacing 2 lpi

vertical spacing 3 lpi

vertical spacing 4 lpi

vertical spacing 6 lpi

vertical spacing 8 lpi

^{CSI 11}l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI 11 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSI 24 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

CSI 4 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

CSI n d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

CSI n k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

CSI n e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

CSI 3 SP L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CSI 9 SP L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CSI 2 SP L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CSI 1 SP L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CSI 0 SP L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CSI 4 SP L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CSI n v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

vertical tab stop

Summary of Possible Codes A-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Standard Character Set

hex

dec

NUL

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

STX

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

129

130

131

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

193

194

195

196

197

298

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

ETX

IND

132

NEL

ENQ

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

133

ACK

134

BEL

135

HTS

136

137

VTS

138

PLD

139

PLU

140

141

142

143

CAN

ESC

CSI

155

156

157

158

159

DEL

127

DEL

255

For the contents of the shaded areas, see table at page B-3.

B-2 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

International Substitution Table - normal font

dec

hex

96 123 124 125 126

60 7B 7C 7D 7E

USA

Great Britain

Sweden

Germany

Portugal

France

Italy

Spain

Norway

The contents of the columns 8 and 9 depend on the settings in the printer’s menue.

Character Sets B-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programmer’s Reference

Tally ANSI Barcode and LCP

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Barcode and LCP Printing

Introduction

Secured/Unsecured Mode

Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Barcode Printing

Barcode Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Header Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transparent Barcode/LCP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Barcode Print Feature F for Selection of F-Code . . . . . . . . .

Barcode Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Barcode Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Formats of Barcode Types

Code Matrix 2/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code 2/5 Industrial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code 2/5 Interleaved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code BCD-Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CODABAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code EAN 8 with HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code EAN 8 without HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code EAN 13 with HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code EAN 13 without HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code MSI / modified Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code UPCA with HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code UPCA without HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code UPCE with HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code UPCE without HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Delta distance (IBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EAN 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Add-On Barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Check Number Calculation

EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UPCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UPCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Add-On 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Add-On 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

US Postnet Barcode

Sequence Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Large Character Printing (LCP)

LCP Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LCP Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LCP Character Set Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Various Examples

Exemples 1 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 - 48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix

Character Sets

LCP Character Set, German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-3

A-4

A-5

A-6

LCP Character Set, US-ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OCR-A Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OCR-B Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Barcode and LCP Printing

Introduction

Secured/Unsecured Mode

Barcode Printing

US Postnet Barcode

Large Character Printing (LCP)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

This User’s Manual describes all barcode and LCP sequences and control codes, regard-

less of your printer’s special barcode and LCP implementation (LCP = Large Character

Printing).

Be sure to observe the notes in the operator’s manual regarding the special barcode/LCP

Types implemented in your printer and which of the sequences described here are not

available as a result.

Select the Barcode Mode as described in the operator’s manual. Selecting this emulation

mode automatically selects the corresponding character set.

To print barcode or LCP characters, the following steps must be carried out in most cases:

Activate barcode

Activate secured/unsecured mode

(see section "Secured/Unsecured Mode")

Transfer barcode and/or LCP header

(see sections "Barcode Header" and "LCP Header")

Calculate check number

(barcode only, see section "Calculate Check Number")

Transfer barcode and/or LCP data

(see sections "Barcode Typees" and "LCP Header")

Deactivate barcode (if necessary)

The following commands are used to print barcode and LCP characters:

SUB

Start Character Barcode header

DLE

Start Character LCP header

DC4

Stop Character Barcode and LCP header

Barcode brackets (start and end characters for barcode data)

LCP brackets (start and end characters for LCP data)

Settings for Barcode and LCP

ESC P ... ESC \

2 Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This may cause conflict with other emulations, since the above commands may have dif-

ferent functions in these emulations, for example:

DC4

ESC P <n>

ESC P

Condensed print

Reset expanded print

Proportional spacing ON/OFF

Pica

In barcode mode the barcode sequences have priority.

The barcode interpreter can be switched on or off with the MTPL sequences

ESC [ ? 11 ~ (Barcode ON) and ESC [ ? 10 ~ (Barcode OFF). The typical transmission

procedure should take place as follows:

Barcode Interpreter ON

Transmit mode specification (barcode header, LCP header, secured/unsecured

mode, ...)

Transmit barcode / LCP

Barcode OFF

The mode specifications is saved temporarily and must only be sent to the printer once.

The specification remains valid until the printer is switched off.

Please note the following explanatory information:

Every sequence description begins with a header in which the function and short form of

the sequence of the barcode Types are listed, e.g.:

2/5 Matrix

Type A

The header is followed by the data structure in ASCII, hexadecimal and decimal repre-

sentation with the necessary parameters, e.g.:

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 start code n ... n

stop code DC4

stop code 14

stop code 20

start code n ... n

Introduction 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The syntax for the parameters, the start, separate and stop code is represented as

follows:

Figures (n)

Start code

Stop code

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

For the parameter (here n), a distinction must be made between two types of repre-

sentation:

if the parameter is in pointed parentheses, the decimal value must be transmitted

if the parameter is not in pointed parentheses, the ASCII value must be transmitted

Example:

Parameter representation:

to be transmitted:

<n>, with n=0

dec.0 (hex.00)

Parameter representation:

to be transmitted:

n, with n=0

ASCII "0" (hex.30, dec.48)

Character explanation and symbol descriptions

Information/important notes

[ ]

Optional, must be not necessarily be transmitted

9-needle printer

24-needle printer

4 Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Special Feature

If you not get the required control codes for Barcode of ASCII code table columns 0 and 1

out of your computer you can use in addition to these Barcode control codes a set of

MTPL sequences to generate these control codes by printable ASCII characters. By this

measure the Barcode programs will remain fully compatible in spite of the additional

MTPL sequences.

Following control codes in Barcode strings can be substituted by the appropriate ANSI se-

quences:

ANSI Sequence

(CSI = Hex 9B or

Control Code

Example (Hex)

Hex 1B 5B or

ESC[ )

SUB

CSI 26 Space s

1B 5B 32 36 20 73

1B 5B 32 35 20 73

1B 5B 32 30 20 73

1B 5B 31 36 20 73

1B 5B 31 35 20 73

CSI 25 Space s

CSI 20 Space s

CSI 16 Space s

CSI 15 Space s

DC4

DLE

ANSI sequences with not matching parameters will be ignored.

These feature is not available with all printers with MTPL emulation.

Special firmware is possibly necessary. Please ask your dealer or representative!

Introduction 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Secured/Unsecured Mode

Unsecured mode

Secured mode

ESC PSC0 ESC \

ESC PSC1 ESC \

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "P" "S" "C" "0" ESC "\"

Unsecured mode

Secured mode

50 53 43 30 1B 5C

80 83 67 48 27 92

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "P" "S" "C" "1" ESC "\"

50 53 43 31 1B 5C

80 83 67 49 27 92

Description

In secured mode, the amount of space the barcode or LCP character requires is "secu-

red". In each line, additional barcode and normal characters can be printed.

These additional characters are printed in the current line and in the following lines wi-

thout influencing the barcode or LCP character. As a result normal characters can be prin-

ted to the right or left of the barcode or LCP character in each line.

In order to guarantee successful barcode and LCP character printing, it is important to in-

sert the correct paper feed commands, so that paper feed is ensured to the end of the

barcode and LCP height.

In unsecured mode, the paper feed necessary for barcode and LCP printing is automatic

and it is not possible to print more than one line with normal characters in the barcode

and LCP line.

All characters in the mixed line are printed, so that the bottom edges are aligned in a

straight line.

6 Secured/Unsecured Mode

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 1

10 REM LCP unsecured mode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[?11~";

30 REM select unsecured mode

40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "PSC0"; CHR$(27); "\";

50 REM set character size to 5

60 LPRINT CHR$(16); "5"; CHR$(25);

70 LPRINT "Example for "

80 LPRINT CHR$(15); "LCP"; CHR$(15); " unsecured mode"

Example 2

10 REM LCP secured mode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[?11~";

30 REM select secured mode

40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "PSC1"; CHR$(27); "\";

50 REM set character size to 5

60 LPRINT CHR$(16); "5"; CHR$(25);

70 LPRINT "This is "; CHR$(15); "LCP"; CHR$(15);

80 LPRINT " an ex-"

90 LPRINT "ample

of an"

100 LPRINT "expres- sion"

110 LPRINT "in the secured mode"

Secured/Unsecured Mode 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Barcode Printing

Barcode

Header

Before the data, which contains the barcode information, are transmitted to the printer,

the barcode header must be sent. Otherwise the standard parameter values are used

(see section "Header Format"). In the header, the printing parameters, the barcode size

and the barcode type are defined. This header only needs to be transferred once, unless

settings are to be changed or the printer has been turned off.

Header Format

Format: SUB [F] a [n] [;xyz] EM

[ ]

Specification is optional

x, y unregarded at EAN/UPC-Barcode!

For Code 128 and EAN 128 (Type S+T) only the X parameter is valid. This is

automatically used for the Y parameter. The Z parameter is not evaluated.

Meaning of the characters:

SUB (hex.1A, dec.26)

Start header

Print feature (see section "Barcode Print Feature F"

to select the F codes, page 10)

ASCII

a = "A"..."S"

n = "0"..."90"

Barcode Types (see section "Barcode Types")

Barcode height in n/6 inch.

At n="0" the barcode height equals to 1/12 inch.

Separation character

Width of the narrow bar (see section "Barcode width")

Width of the narrow space (see section "Barcode width")

Ratio of wide to narrow (see section "Barcode width")

End of header

;

ASCII

x = "0"..."3"

y = "0"..."3"

z = "0"..."3"

EM (hex.19, dec.25)

For encoding ASCII values to decimal or hexadecimal values refer to the appendix,

"Character Sets".

8 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The default parameter values are the following:

Unsecured mode (see section "Secured/Unsecured mode")

HRI OFF, Normal Print, Double Pass (F = SP)

Barcode Type 2/5 matrix (a = "A")

Barcode height 1/6 inch (n = "1")

Narrow bar (x = "0")

Narrow space (y = "0")

Ratio of wide to narrow 2 to 1 (z = "0")

When only parts of the header are to be changed, copy the header up to the parameter

which must be changed, and then close the header with the end-of-header character. If a

header error was detected the total previous features are still active.

The "Barcode brackets" (hex.14, dec.20), initiate and terminate the printing of the bar-

codes.

If the printer is switched OFFLINE, all defined barcodes are printed out completely. Plea-

se not that the barcode remains resident in the background and can be activated again

by the barcode bracket. Text justification and centering are both permitted. With activated

barcodes these function are not carried out, since they lead to conflicts with the barcodes.

Transparent

Barcode /

Following control codes in Barcode strings can be substituted by the appropriate MTPL

sequences (see also section "Special Feature" on page 5):

LCP commands

Control Code

ANSI Sequence (CSI = Hex 9B or ESC[ )

CSI 26 Space s

SUB

CSI 25 Space s

DC4

DLE

CSI 20 Space s

CSI 16 Space s

CSI 15 Space s

MTPL sequences with not matching parameters will be ignored.

This sequences may only be used with activated BARCODE.

Barcode Printing 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Barcode Print

Feature F for

Selection of

F-Code

HRI or normal/compressed as well as single or double pass is switched via character F

according to the following table.

HRI )

Pass )

Direction )

ASCII

Hex-

Char. Value

Off

Normal Compr. Double Single Unidir. Bidir.

‘

(

)

–

0 )

1 )

) It is recommended, to avoid using of ASCII Characters 0 and 1 when possible, since

they are reserved for future functions.

) Human Readable Index

) It depends on the used printer type whether the printer performs "Double Pass" with

two physical print passes or special print modes (i.e. emphasized).

10 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Barcode Types A = 2/5 matrix (default)

B = 2/5 industrial

C = 2/5 interleaved

D = Code 11

= Code BCD matrix

F = Code 39

G = Codabar

H = EAN 8 with HRI

= EAN 8 without HRI

J = 2/5 matrix (default)

K = EAN 13 with HRI

L = EAN 13 without HRI

M = MSI/modified Plessey

N = UPC A with HRI

O = UPC A without HRI

P = UPC E with HRI

Q = UPC E without HRI

R = Delta Distance (IBM)

S = Code 128

= EAN 128

All commercial barcodes (for labeling systems) of the H, I, K, L, N, O, P, Q Types can be

extended using the barcodes Add-On 2 or Add-On 5 (see section "Add-On Barcodes").

HRI

HRI = Human Readable Index

HRI characters are centered if enough space is left. If the barcode-printout is smaller than

the HRI character field, smaller character density (CPI) is used. Start and stop codes are

not printed as HRI; a space character (SP) will be stored.

Barcode Printing 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Barcode Width

By specifying an ASCII value from 0 to 3, the barcode width can be defined. This allows

ideal adaption to the scanner specifications, particularly for long-range scanners.

Table 1

Normal

Compressed )

Header

Para-

meter

older printer

types

(e.g.MT230)

older printer

types

(e.g.MT230)

x = 0 0.53 mm 0.54 mm 0.48 mm 0.32 mm 0.33 mm 0.27 mm

x = 1 0.74 mm 0.67 mm 0.69 mm 0.53 mm 0.43 mm 0.37 mm

x = 2 1.16 mm 1.09 mm 1.16 mm 0.74 mm 0.65 mm 0.59 mm

x = 3 1.38 mm 1.30 mm 1.33 mm 0.95 mm 0.88 mm 0.90 mm

Width of

the

narrow bar

y = 0 0.53 mm 0.54 mm 0.48 mm 0.32 mm 0.33 mm 0.27 mm

y = 1 0.74 mm 0.67 mm 0.69 mm 0.53 mm 0.43 mm 0.37 mm

y = 2 1.16 mm 1.09 mm 1.16 mm 0.74 mm 0.65 mm 0.59 mm

y = 3 1.38 mm 1.30 mm 1.33 mm 0.95 mm 0.88 mm 0.90 mm

Width of

the

narrow

space

z = 0

z = 1

z = 2

z = 3

2.0 : 1

2.5 : 1

3.0 : 1

3.5 : 1

2.0 : 1 )

Enlarge-

ment

factor

2.5 : 1 )

3.0 : 1 )

3.5 : 1 )

EAN/UPC Barcode

(X, Y = unregarded):

Table 2

Header Parameter

Normal

Compressed )

Enlargement

factor

z = 0

z = 1

1.95 : 1

1.60 : 1

1.30 : 1

0.95 : 1

1) These values are true, if "Compressed Print" is selected in the menu (see print feature [F]).

2) Note: It is recommended to set the bar width equal to the space width (x=y).

3) Printer-dependent reference value.

12 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

All values are only valid when a new colour ribbon is used. They change depending on

the degree of wear:

narrow bar:

approx. -0.05 mm

approx. +0.05 mm.

narrow space:

The Code EAN 128, as the EAN/UPC, is based on module widths. Therefore only the X

parameter is valid for this type. This parameter is also used for the Y parameter (narrow

bar width). The Z parameter has no meaning. In combination with the normal/condensed

feature, 8 widths result (see table 1).

Error Code

Wrong characters in a control code or in a barcode test (e.g. an undefined character in a

certain barcode Type) cause the barcode error sign to be printed.

Barcode Printing 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Data Formats of Barcode Types

Code 2/5 Matrix

Type A

Syntax

Figures (n)

Start code

Stop code

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

n ... n

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM code 2/5 matrix barcode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" A3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":123:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

14 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 2/5 Industrial

Type B

Syntax

Figures (n)

Start code

Stop code

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":", "<" or ">"

3A, 3C or 3E

58, 60 or 62

";", "=" or "?"

3B, 3D or 3F

59, 61 or 63

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

n ... n

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM code 2/5 industrial barcode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" B3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":123;";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Barcode Printing 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 2/5 Interleaved

Type C

Syntax

Figures (n)

Start code

Stop code

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":" or "<"

3A or 3C

58 or 60

";" or "="

3B or 3D

59 or 61

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

n ... n

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM code 2/5 interleaved barcode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" C3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":123;";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Due to the "interleaved mechanism", data stream (n ... n) should only be transferred as

even number e.g.:

not: 398 but: 0398

If odd count of numbers are transferred the printer adds a leading zero to the printed

barcode.

16 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 11

Type D

Syntax

Figures/Characters (n)

Start code

Stop code

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9" and "-"

30 to 39 and 2D

48 to 57 and 45

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

n ... n

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM code 11 barcode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" D3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":123:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Barcode Printing 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code BCD Matrix

Type E

Syntax

Figures (n)

Start code

Stop code

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

n ... n

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM BCD-matrix-code barcode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" E3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":123:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

18 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 39

Type F

Syntax

Numbers/Character (n)

Start code

Stop code

not fixed,

recommended:

ASCII

hex.

"0" to "9", "A" to "Z" and

"$", "%", "*", "+", "-", ".", "/"

"*"

30 to 39, 41 to 5A and

24, 25, 2A, 2B, 2D, 2E, 2F

48 to 57, 65 to 90 and

36, 37, 42, 43, 45, 46, 47

dec.

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

n ... n

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM code 39 barcode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" F3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);"*123*";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Barcode Printing 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CODABAR

Type G

Syntax

Numbers/Character (n)

Start code

Stop code

not fixed,

recommended:

ASCII

"0" to "9", "A" to "D" and

"$", "+", "-", ".", "/", ":"

"a" to "e" and

"n", "t", "*"

"a" to "e" and

"n", "t", "*"

30 to 39 and

24, 2B, 2D, 2E, 2F, 3A

hex.

dec.

61 to 65 and

6E, 74, 2A

61 to 65 and

6E, 74, 2A

48 to 57 and

36, 43, 45, 46, 47, 58

97 to 101 and

110, 116,42

97 to 101 and

110, 116,42

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

n ... n

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM codabar barcode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" G3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);"*123*";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

20 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code EAN 8 with HRI

Type H

Syntax

Figures (n)

Check

Number (c)

Start code

Separation

code

Stop code

Calculation

see section

"Check Number

Calculation"

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

nnnn

Separation code nnnc

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM code EAN 8 with HRI

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" H3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":0123:4567:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Barcode Printing 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code EAN 8 without HRI

Type I

Syntax

Figures (n)

Check

Number (c)

Start code

Separation

code

Stop code

Calculation

see section

"Check Number

Calculation"

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

nnnn

Separation code nnnc

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM code EAN 8 without HRI

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" I3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":0123:4567:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

22 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code EAN 13 with HRI

Type K

Syntax

Figures (n)

Check

Number (c)

Start code

Separation

code

Stop code

Calculation

see section

"Check Number

Calculation"

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

nnnnnnn

Separation code

nnnnnc

Stop code DC4

Stop code

10 REM code EAN 13 with HRI

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" K3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":0123456:789012:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Barcode Printing 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code EAN 13 without HRI

Type L

Syntax

Figures (n)

Check

Number (c)

Start code

Separation

code

Stop code

Calculation

see section

"Check Number

Calculation"

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

nnnnnnn

Separation code

nnnnnc

Stop code DC4

Stop code

10 REM code EAN 13 without HRI

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" L3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":0123456:789012:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

24 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code MSI / modified Plessey

Type M

Syntax

Figures (n)

Start code

Stop code

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

";"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

n ... n

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM code MSI/plessey modified

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" M3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":0123;";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Barcode Printing 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code UPC A with HRI

Type N

Syntax

Figures (n)

Check

Number (c)

Start code

Separation

code

Stop code

Calculation

see section

"Check Number

Calculation"

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code DC4

14 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 14

20 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 20

10 REM code UPC A with HRI

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" N3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":012345:678901:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

26 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code UPC A without HRI

Type O

Syntax

Figures (n)

Check

Number (c)

Start code

Separation

code

Stop code

Calculation

see section

"Check Number

Calculation"

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code DC4

14 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 14

20 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 20

10 REM code UPC A without HRI

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" O3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":012345:678901:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Barcode Printing 27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code UPC E with HRI

Type P

Syntax

Figures (n)

Check Number (c)

Start code

Stop code

Calculation

see section

"Check Number

Calculation"

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

nnnnnnnc

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

Start code

10 REM code UPC E with HRI

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" P3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":01234567:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

28 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code UPC E without HRI

Type Q

Syntax

Figures (n)

Check Number (c)

Start code

Stop code

Calculation

see section

"Check Number

Calculation"

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9"

30 to 39

48 to 57

":"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

nnnnnnnc

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

Start code

10 REM code UPC E without HRI

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" Q3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":01234567:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Barcode Printing 29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code Delta distance (IBM)

Type R

Syntax

Figures/Characters (n)

Start code

Stop code

ASCII

hex.

dec.

"0" to "9" and "A" to "F"

30 to 39 and 41 to 46

48 to 57 and 65 to 70

"F"

"D"

Data Structure

Example

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 Start code

14 Start code

20 Start code

n ... n

Stop code DC4

Stop code 14

Stop code 20

10 REM code delta distance (IBM) without HRI

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" R3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);"F0123D";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

30 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128

Type S

Syntax

Figures/Characters (n)

Start code

none

Stop code

none

ASCII

hex.

dec.

see table

section "Description"

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 n ... n DC4

14 n ... n 14

20 n ... n 20

While many barcode styles are limited to numbers, Code 128 can encode numbers, let-

ters, and other symbols commonly found on keyboards, such as @, # and %. The Code

128 barcode is like three barcodes in one. The three barcode styles are called Code A,

Code B, and Code C. Each barcode style is designed to encode certain types of data in

the most compact way.

Code A encodes uppercase alpha, numeric and control codes.

Code B encodes upper and lower case alpha and numeric codes.

Code C encodes digits in pairs.

A single Code 128 barcode may consist of all three Code 128 barcode styles A, B and C.

The printer chooses the styles which result in the most compact Code 128 barcode for

the data to be encoded. Thus, the user needn’t be concerned about choosing the correct

barcode styles as this is done automatically.

The ">" (greater than) symbol is a special character prefix. If a character with decimal va-

lue less then 32 needs to be encoded (i.e., a control character), then send a ">" followed

by the character that is decimal 64 higher then the control code character.

Control characters are conflicting with DC4, SUB ... these characters are encoded by

using the ">" sign following a number that is 64 dec. higher than the control character.

Barcode Printing 31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

If you need to print a Carriage Return (hex.0D, dec.13), as part of a barcode, you need to

send ">M" (13 + 64 = 77, see character set table to verify that decimal 77 equals the capi-

tal letter "M"). This substitution process can be carried out throughout the range of deci-

mal values, i.e., ">d" (decimal 100) equates to the dollar symbol (decimal 36). If the grea-

ter-than symbol itself must be transmitted, send ">0" (the 0 will not be part of the printed

data).

The Code 128 barcode style selection can also be done manually. This is done by adding

a style selection character to the beginning of the barcode data. Choose code A, B, or C

from the table of special characters below:

Special Character

Code 128

">0"

">1"

">2"

">3"

">4"

">5"

">6"

">7"

">8"

30 (">")

99 (Code C)

100 (Code B)

101 (Code A)

102

When a style selection has been made, character data will be translated from the selec-

ted code style to the Code 128 repesentation. The translation table on the following page

summarizes this:

32 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128 translation table

Wert Code A Code B Code C

Code A Code B Code C

Wert Code A Code B Code C

Wert

Space Space

100

101

102

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

{

}

‘

[

(

)

‘

hyphen hyphen

period period

FNC3

FNC2

SHIFT SHIFT

CODEC CODEC

CODEB FUNC4 CODEB

FNC4 CODEA CODEA

FNC1

DEL

FNC3

FNC2

]

;

‘

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

FNC1

Codes 96 through 102 do not have

corresponding ASCII character

translations; these may be encoded

using the special character table above.

Barcode Printing 33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

10 REM code 128

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" S3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);"ABCD0123";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

34 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 128

Type T

Syntax

Figures/Characters (n)

see Code 128

Start code

none

Stop code

none

ASCII

hex.

dec.

Data Structure

Description

ASCII

hex.

dec.

DC4 n ... n DC4

14 n ... n 14

20 n ... n 20

The only difference between both types of barcodes is the initial sequence.

Code 128 starts with Code A, Code B or Code C followed by character information.

Barcode EAN 128 requires the code FNC1 between Startcode and character information.

The Code 128 translation table remains valid. The checksum of EAN 128 is calculated

using Code 128 algorythm.

Example

10 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

20 LPRINT CHR$(26);" T3;111";CHR$(25);

30 LPRINT CHR$(20);"1234ABCD";CHR$(20);

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Barcode Printing 35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Add-On

UPC and EAN barcodes (commercial barcodes) can be extended with Add-On barcodes.

Barcodes

The following barcodes can be extended with Add-On barcodes:

Barcode Types H, I, K, L, N, O, P and Q

In the data formats the numbers are generally given in the sequence they are printed

from left to right in the barcode, i.e. in the case of the EAN13 code, the 13. figure is trans-

ferred first and the 1. figure last. For the formats for the Add-On barcodes, the printer ex-

pects the check number as the first figure. This is not printed in the barcode. The follo-

wing numbers (2 or 5) are printed from left to right in Add-On barcode.

Example 1

EAN13 barcode with HRI and Add On 2 extention

Format:

DC4:nnnnnnn:nnnnnn:cnn:DC4

10 REM code EAN 13 with add-on-2 extention

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" K3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":0123456:789012:012:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

36 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 2

EAN13 barcode with HRI and Add On 5 extention

Format: DC4:nnnnnnn:nnnnnn:cnnnnn:DC4

10 REM code EAN 13 with add-on-5 extention

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(26);" K3;111";CHR$(25);

40 LPRINT CHR$(20);":0123456:789012:012345:";CHR$(20);

50 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

Barcode Printing 37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Check

The following barcode types must be given a check number for transfer to the printer:

Number

Calculation

Type H and I (EAN 8)

Type K and L (EAN 13)

Type N and O (UPC A)

Type P and Q (UPC E)

The check number (c) is transferred after the barcode information (n). For the "EAN" type,

this is printed as the last figure in the HRI data line. For the "UPC" type, the check num-

ber is not printed in the HRI data line.

The commercial barcodes can be extended with the following user-specific additional bar-

codes (see also section "Add-On Barcodes"):

Add-On 2 barcode

Add-On 5 barcode

Here the check number (c) is transferred before the barcode information (n).

EAN 13

12 numbers are transferred for the EAN 13 code. The 13. digit represents the check num-

ber. The even figures of the information have a factor of "3", the uneven figures a factor of

"1". Counting begins from the left. The resulting cross sum is divided by 10. The remai-

ning figure is subtracted from the modul (10). If the remainder is "0", the check number is

also "0".

Example

Information

Factor

Product

Cross sum

4 + 0 + 1 + 6 + 3 + 12 + 5 + 18 + 7 + 24 + 9 + 0

10 (modul) - 9 (remainder) = 1 (check number)

For remainder "0" the check number is also "0".

38 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 8

7 numbers are transferred for the EAN 8 code. The 8. digit represents the check number.

The even figures of the information have a factor of "3", the uneven figures a factor of "1".

Counting begins from the left. The resulting cross sum is divided by 10. The remaining fig-

ure is subtracted from the modul (10). If the remainder is "0", the check number is also "0".

Example

Information

Factor

Product

Cross sum

12 + 0 + 3 + 2 + 9 + 4 + 18

10 (modul) - 8 (remainder) = 2 (check number)

For remainder "0" the check number is also "0".

UPCA

11 numbers are transferred for the UPCA code. The 12. digit represents the check num-

ber. The even figures of the information have a factor of "3", the uneven figures a factor of

"1". Counting begins from the left. The resulting cross sum is divided by 10. The remai-

ning figure is subtracted from the modul (10). If the remainder is "0", the check number is

also "0".

Example

Information

Factor

Product

Cross sum

12 + 0 + 3 + 2 + 9 + 4 + 15 + 6 + 21 + 8 + 27

107

10 (modul) - 7 (remainder) = 3 (check number)

For remainder "0" the check number is also "0".

Barcode Printing 39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPCE

For the UPCE barcode type, 7 numbers are transmitted. The 8. digit is the check number.

The uneven figures of the information have a factor of "3", the even figures a factor of "1".

Counting begins from the left. The resulting cross sum is divided by 10. The remaining in-

teger value is subtracted from the modul (10). The result is transmitted as the check num-

ber (c).

Example

Information

Factor

Product

Cross sum

0 + 1 + 6 + 3 + 12 + 5 + 18

10 (modul) - 5 (remainder) = 5 (check number)

For remainder "0" the check number is also "0".

Add-On 5

6 numbers are transmitted: check number (c) + 5 information items (n). The uneven figu-

res of the information have a factor of "3", the even figures a factor of "1". Counting be-

gins from the right. The resulting cross sum is divided by 10. The remaining integer value

is subtracted from the modul (10). The result is transmitted as the check number (c).

Example

Information

Factor

Product

Cross sum

24 + 54 + 3 + 0 + 12

3 (remainder) = 3 (check number)

The check number is not printed in the clear data line (HRI).

40 Barcode Printing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Add-On 2

3 numbers are transmitted: check number (c) and 2 informations (n).

The check number results from the remaining integer value of modul (4).

Example 1

Information

Remainder (0)

Example 2

Information

Remainder (2)

Example 3

Information

Remainder (3)

Example 4

Information

Remainder (1)

The check number always lies between "0" and "3"; it is not printed in the HRI line.

Barcode Printing 41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

US Postnet Barcode

ESC [ 1 SP p

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "["

1B 5B 31 20 70

27 91 49 32 112

"1" SP "p"

Description

After receiving this sequence numeric characters from 0 (hex. 30) to 9 (hex. 39) are inter-

preted as barcode figures. Other Alpha characters are ignored. Control characters from

hex.00 (dec.9) to hex.1F (dec.31) terminates this barcode mode.

You may use this sequence in every emulation. The printer can print barcode in NLQ and

LQ. If draft print quality (DPQ) is selected the printout is performed in NLQ.

The character (e.g. CR = carriage return, hex. 0D), which terminates barcode mode will

neither be printed nor carried out. A tab command (hex.09, dec.9) is carried out in this

barcode.

10 REM US postnet barcode

20 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[1 p";"1234567";CHR$(13);

40 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[?10~"

42 US Postnet Barcode

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Large Character Printing (LCP)

Before you can transfer the LCP data (Large Character Printing) data to the printer, the

LCP header must be sent. The LCP header is made up of a series of max. 5 characters.

In the header, the printing parameters and the LCP character size are defined. This hea-

der only needs to be transferred once, unless settings are to be changed or the printer

has been turned off.

LCP Header

Format: DLE [!] n EM

[ ] optional, does not need to be transmitted

Character meaning:

DLE (hex.10, dec.16)

start character

ASCII

bidirectional printing (if transferred)

enlargement factor

end character

n = "2"..."99"

EM (hex.19, dec.25)

with the help of the header, the enlargement factor is fixed to the original size. A character in

LCP mode with the size n occupies a horizontal space for n normal character, depending on the

selected character distance. At a character distance of 10 characters/inch and an enlargement

factor of 6, the LCP font width is 6/10 inch.

The height of a LCP character is n times 1/12 inch. It is independent of the selected line

spacing. The LCP characters are printed, so that their lower edges lie flush with the next

available ground line. The result is that only the upper edges of characters with an un-

even enlargement factor can lie flush with the line.

LCP Data

The existence of a LCP header does not mean that all subsequent characters are printed

in LCP size. The LCP mode must be begun and it must end with the LCP brackets SI

(hex.0F, dec.15). All characters inside these brackets are printed as LCP characters. The

LCP mode is ended by all characters from hex.00 to hex.1F.

LCP characters can be printed with character densities 10, 12, 15, 17.1 and 20 cpi. If

there is a LCP line overflow, the printing procedure is automatically started. All characters

which caused the overflow are then printed as normal characters.

Large Character Printing (LCP) 43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Refer to the section "Secured/Unsecured Mode" at the front of the Manual for detailed

description of the secured/unsecured mode.

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

n ... n SI

0F n ... n 0F

15 n ... n 15

n = all printable characters (> hex.1F, dec.31)

Example

REM Example Character Densities

OPEN "lpt1:" FOR RANDOM AS #1

WIDTH #1, 255

PRINT #1, CHR$(27); "[?11~";

PRINT #1, CHR$(16); "4"; CHR$(25);

PRINT #1, CHR$(27); "[6w"; :REM 15CPI

PRINT #1, CHR$(15); "LCP ";CHR$(15);

PRINT #1, CHR$(27); "[5w"; :REM 12CPI

PRINT #1, CHR$(15); "LCP ";CHR$(15);

PRINT #1, CHR$(27); "[4w"; :REM 10CPI

PRINT #1, CHR$(15); "LCP ";CHR$(15);

PRINT #1, STRING$ (5, 10);

END

44 Large Character Printing (LCP)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LCP Character Set US-ASCII

LCP Character Set German

ESC P L S 0 1 ESC \

ESC P L S 0 2 ESC \

Data Structure

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "P" "L" "S" "0" "1" ESC "\"

1B 50 4C 53 30 31 1B 5C

27 80 76 83 48 49 27 92

character set US-ASCII

character set german

ASCII

hex.

dec.

ESC "P" "L" "S" "0" "2" ESC "\"

1B 50 4C 53 30 32 1B 5C

27 80 76 83 48 50 27 92

Large Character Printing (LCP) 45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Various Examples

Example 1

10 LPRINT "Example for different LCP character sizes"

20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[?11~";

30 LPRINT CHR$(27); "PSC0"; CHR$(27); "\";

40 REM set character size to 3

50 LPRINT CHR$(16); "3"; CHR$(25);

60 LPRINT CHR$(15); "3"; CHR$(15);

70 REM set character size to 4

80 LPRINT CHR$(16); "4"; CHR$(25);

90 LPRINT CHR$(15); "4"; CHR$(15);

100 REM set character size to 5

110 LPRINT CHR$(16); "5"; CHR$(25);

120 LPRINT CHR$(15); "5"; CHR$(15);

130 REM set character size to 6

140 LPRINT CHR$(16); "6"; CHR$(25);

150 LPRINT CHR$(15); "6"; CHR$(15);

160 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[?10~"

170 END

46 Various Examples

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 2

REM Example 2 for unsecured printing

OPEN "lpt1:" FOR RANDOM AS #1

WIDTH #1, 255

PRINT #1, CHR$(27); "[?11~";

PRINT #1, CHR$(27); "PSCO"; CHR$(27); "\";

PRINT #1, CHR$(16); "5"; CHR$(25);

PRINT #1, "Example for ";

PRINT #1, CHR$(15); "LCP"; CHR$(15);" unsecured mode";

PRINT #1, CHR$(10); CHR$(13);

END

Example 3

REM Example 3 for secured printing

OPEN "lpt1:" FOR RANDOM AS #1

WIDTH #1, 255

PRINT #1, CHR$(27); "[?11~";

PRINT #1, CHR$(27); "PSC1"; CHR$(27); "\";

PRINT #1, CHR$(16); "5"; CHR$(25);

PRINT #1, "Example for ";

PRINT #1, CHR$(15); "LCP"; CHR$(15);

PRINT #1, " secured"; CHR$(10); "mode";

PRINT #1, STRING$(5, 10);

END

Various Examples 47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example 4

Unsecured Mode, vertical spacing with various enlargement factors

Legend

A – a single line Feed (1/6")

B – Factor 6 character; heigth 6×₁₂ü 3×₆¹LF

7×

C – Factor 7 character; height

additional space is added to gain a full Line Feed

D – Factor 4 character; height 4×₁₂ü 2×₆¹LF

5×

E – Factor 5 character; height

additional space is added to gain a full Line Feed

▲ – start, actual print (cursor)-position

● – end, actual print-position

Description

The room will be occupied to fit the highest character in one line. Characters which will

not meet the 1/6" grid *) are adding additional space to fill the room to the next possible

line.

*) this value may change due to actual line density setting.

48 Various Examples

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix

Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following symbol sets are available in the barcode mode.

The LCP symbol sets can only be selected via Escape sequences. The OCR-A and

OCR-B fonts can be selected via control panel or by Escape sequences, which corre-

spond to the selected emulation mode. The codes hex.A0 up to hex.FE correspond to the

selected character set.

The following example shows you how to find the hexadecimal value for a character from

the character set table.

hex

dec

NUL

ASCII "B" = dec.66, hex.42

DC2

A-2 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LCP Character Set, german

hex

dec

NUL

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

Character Sets A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LCP Character Set, US-ASCII

hex

dec

NUL

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

A-4 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OCR-A Character Set (Code Page 437)

hex

dec

NUL

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

Character Sets A-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OCR-B Character Set (Code Page 437)

hex

dec

NUL

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

A-6 Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sennheiser Stereo Receiver qp 3041 User Manual
Sony Blu ray Player BDPS1200 User Manual
Sony Camcorder 4 170 539 111 User Manual
Sony Car Stereo System IBAR12 User Manual
Sony Laptop 7x2l User Manual
Sony MP3 Player D NE326CK User Manual
Southbend Lathe sb1016 User Manual
State Industries Water Heater TPG 140 140 User Manual
Sylvania DVD VCR Combo DVC845E User Manual
Tapco Musical Instrument Blend 16 User Manual